JP2022079745A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having appropriate durability of a transmission member.

SOLUTION: When a player operates a lever member 340 to one side, the lever member 340 travels in a direction separating from an eccentric cam member 333, thus suppressing application of a load from the lever member 340 to a first drive unit 335 and the eccentric cam member 333. Application of the load to a player by the lever member 340 is suppressed by drive.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the durability of the transmission member.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having good durability of a transmission member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 generates a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position and a driving force that moves the moving member by being operated by the player. A gaming machine including a driving device for causing a pachinko machine and a transmission member for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving device to the moving member. By operating the moving member in one direction, the moving member can be moved. It moves in a direction away from the transmission member.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is composed of a member in which the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and rotated about the first axis in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 includes, in the gaming machine according to claim 2, a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is the moving member. And the direction in which the transmission member is brought close to each other.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the durability of the transmitting member can be further improved by the posture when the transmitting member receives a load.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the configuration of the transmission member can be utilized for the production.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member, and the swing member of a lever member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member in the XVc-XVc line of FIG. 15 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. 18A. It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in the XX-XX line of FIG. 17 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a side view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of the main body member, and (d) is a side view of the main body member in the direction view of the arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. .. (A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the direction view of XXXIIc. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a). (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of the main body member of the swing member illustrated in the axial direction view of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state which the U-shaped member was slid and moved from the state. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of the operation device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the lock member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17A. (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). It is a figure. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operating device viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view of. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. (A) to (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocked cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocked cam member, and a lock member showing the operation of the lock member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member. (A) and (b) are the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 8th Embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, so that a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening. The out openings are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a, 337a and a vibration device 366.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by the player, and the swing operation member 310 includes a storage recess 17a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area formed by the accommodation recess 15a recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the left-right direction of the unit 15 is movable.

There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recesses 15a and 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grip the swing operation member 310 in a manner of grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recess 17a is caught on the back side surface of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if the force is relaxed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from slipping off from the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player to maintain his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is in a downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment). ) Is shown, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

The accommodating recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged so as to be sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent the player from pinching a finger between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodation recess 15a and the accommodation recess 17a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts a finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and grips the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as the push button portion is arranged facing the palm, so that the player can push the vibrating member 310 by grasping and holding the swinging operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or changing the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where the player touches the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, finger, etc.), and the vibration is the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to perform an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be planned, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of not being able to concentrate can be solved.

Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether or not the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). Whether or not it is moving) is difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to notify only the player who holds the swing operation member 310 of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, so that the player can feel that he / she is operating.

When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311. By bending the back side frame member 311 in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7 (b). Even in a posture in which the wrist is stiffened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, it is possible to prevent the fingertip from coming off the back side frame member 311.

Further, by catching the fingertip on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, and the wrist naturally returns. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in a manner of releasing the return of the wrist. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310.

As shown in FIG. 6, compared to the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, from the upper end of the swing operation member 310. The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Thereby, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the shaft support rod 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to rotate (erroneously operate) the swing operation member 310 around the center of the shaft support rod 363, a large force can be required. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player when gripping the upper part of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310, and the player puts his / her hand on the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 and heads. It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, the swing operation member 310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed on the back side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover member 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover member 344,345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a convex portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, and a front cover 321 and an upper cover. The left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 and the inner case member 330 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left-right direction of the 322 are internally fitted. Mainly includes a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a overhanging and arranged inside the above.

By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief by disassembling the operating device 300.

The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2 thereof. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 in the form of a photocoupler, which is arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In addition, in FIG. 10, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 in which a lever member 340 is arranged inside in a box shape, and an eccentric cam projected from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, in which the relative phase between the eccentric cam member 333 and the eccentric cam member 333 is invariant. A first drive device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. A second drive device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the lock member 336, and a gear damper 338 that is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 340. , Mainly prepared.

The left cover member 331 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening formed to the right, and has a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left side portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side in front view (back side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extending to the right from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b to the front. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-shaped members that are projected to the right from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape. A 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331d protruding to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Mainly includes a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331 g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the wheel.

The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening formed to the left, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332b that is offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and extends to the left from the edges of the lower side wall portion 332a and the upper side wall portion 332b and is on the front side. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that is in contact with the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion and a pair of circular shapes are bored in the lower side wall portion 332a, and the gear portion of the second drive device 337 is formed. The drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, the plurality of insertion holes 332e bored in the upper side wall portion 332b, the sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and the upper side wall portion 332b stretched to the right. A bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 332g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular convex portion that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. Mainly equipped with 332i.

The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a 1/4 circular shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when the front side upper portion is viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are formed. The upper part on the front side is provided with notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction.

The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1 which is a swing shaft in the extending direction). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the 1/4 circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d has a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric camshaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the surface and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member on which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are inserted in a phase-aligned state.

The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted, the lock shaft 331d3 is a member to which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is pivotally supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is a lock. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. The gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and the drive member insertion hole 331e3, which is arranged below the rear side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed in a combination of a pair of circular shapes, are formed. Mainly prepare.

In the guide support hole 331e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted to guide the swing of the lever member 340, and the end of the swing of the lever member 340 is defined by the end portion.

The sensor member 331f detects that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f, and detects the posture of the lock member 336.

The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. Therefore, by adjusting the shape of each circle, the drive gear 337b of the second drive device 337 can be made large. The pedestal portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle in a state where the right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle.

As a result, the drive gear 337b is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported by the second drive device 337 (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the inserted second drive device 337 It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having the same diameter as the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 which is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and is guided by the angle control rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape arranged on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. The first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and the rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is arranged at a position rotated around the shaft support portion 332g. It mainly includes a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

The torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are arranged below the front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is abutted against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is abutted against the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 rises.

The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By externally fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, it is possible to firmly align the eccentric camshaft 331d2.

The first drive device 335 mainly includes a drive motor 335a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 335a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 335b is meshed with the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

The lock member 336 is a member for preventing the lever member 340 from swinging, and has a main body portion 336a whose tip end side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and a shaft formed on the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-like protrusion from the base end side of the main body portion 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the axial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d to be provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and allowing passage through a gap of the sensor member 331f.

The guide hole 336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 336c can define the swing end of the lock member 336.

The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 337b is meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that rotates in mesh, and the gear member is projected to the right side (inside the inner case member 330) of the left cover member 331 through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear thereof. The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives a viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. In FIG. 11, a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310 is shown, and the gear damper receiving member 342, the posture detection member 343, and the destruction prevention that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340 are shown. The state in which the peeling member 350 arranged as is disassembled is shown.

The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose visual outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is coaxially supported to form an axial outer shape in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detection member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits externally from above into the circular portion of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343, and the upper cover member 344 sandwiching the main body member 341. Coaxially with the lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, the angle control rod member 346 inserted into the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the tubular portion 343a of the posture detection member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341. It mainly includes a peeling member 350 that is pivotally supported, and a swing member 360 that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341.

The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a cylindrical tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. Further, the posture detecting member 343 is located at a position (inner side in FIG. 11) farthest from the cylindrical portion 343a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and the tubular portion 343a in the axial direction. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection piece 343b extending along the line.

The tubular portions 342a and 343a are portions to be inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted through the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

The gear portion 342b is a portion that is meshed with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10) and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion capable of detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

The peeling member 350 is a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and on the upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 arranged above the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed of a magnetic material.

Since the magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 so, it has a function of combining or separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a in the left-right direction, and a pair of shaft holes 341b thereof. The regulation hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b and the front end portion of the main body portion 341a are inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extension direction of the main body portion 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The regulation hole 341f and the like are mainly provided.

The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation rod member 346 is supported.

The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which the shaft support rod 363 that pivotally supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which the regulation rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. Is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the cushioning member 364 is arranged around the shaft support rod 363.

The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has an embodiment of forming a curved surface along a circle centered on a shaft hole 341b on the back surface side. The guide portion 344a is connected to the guide portion 344a, and the outer fitting portion 344b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portions 344a and the outside thereof. It mainly includes a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The connecting portion 344c is reduced in thickness (see FIG. 22).

The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. The back guide portion 345a is formed, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and the rear guide portion 345a sandwiching the outer fitting portion 345b. It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c arranged on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front surface guide portion 345d extending from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

The back guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the positional deviation of the swing member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d causes the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. It is suppressed that the position shifts to.

Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (made of a metal material) of the lever member 340 from directly contacting the lever member 340. That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 formed of the resin material between them, it is possible to alleviate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

The swing member 360 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and capable of swinging around the shaft hole 341e, and is located on the lateral side of the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a to be arranged and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a shaft support coaxially with the main body member 361 while being locked to a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361. A plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362 to be formed, a cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 thereof are internally fitted and outside the shaft hole 341e. The cushioning member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, the cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. 366 mainly includes a vibration device 366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface.

The main body member 361 is coaxially and circularly bored with a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall portion 361b connecting the side wall portions 361a at the front end, and a pair of side wall portions 361a. A shaft hole 361c in which the cushioning member 364 is installed, an elongated angle regulating hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulating rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a, and a side wall portion 361a. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e that is bent and formed in a direction away from each other on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b and to which the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

Since the outer shape of the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c with the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a. Can be rocked.

The shaft hole 361c is externally fitted and supported by the cushioning member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

The angle regulating hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. As a result, the impact when the regulation rod 365 abuts on the angle regulation hole 361d can be suppressed.

The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically locked to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 362a is locked by having a protrusion 362a1 projecting on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside, and the insertion portion 364a on the insertion tip side is formed to have a small diameter, and the root portion 364b is formed on the root side of the insertion portion 364a. Is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

Of those externally supported by the cushioning member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

The vibrating device 366 is a device that moves a pair of members close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and has a copper wire wound around it. A disc-shaped cylinder in which a certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

One end of the torsion spring SP2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in the direction of tilting with respect to the main body member 341.

FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. In addition, in FIG. 13, the illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the back side frame member 311 and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. A vibration guide member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are in phase with each other, and the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole in the central portion and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the central portion of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched. The switch member 315 arranged to face the vibrating member 314, the intermediate member 316 externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 thereof are housed on the back side and are externally supported by the vibrating member 314. The lens member 317 is mainly provided.

According to the above-described configuration, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. ..

The intermediate frame member 312 has a bottom portion 312a in the shape of an annular plate, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c erected on the bottom portion 312a, and a back button member 312d movably arranged on the upper part of the back surface side of the bottom portion 312a so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The bottom portion 312a includes a rectangular recessed portion 312a1 that is recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. This makes it possible to prevent the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operating direction when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress the generation of resistance in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. .. Further, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, it is possible to suppress the vibrating member 314 from tilting.

Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction and repeatedly collides with another member at the end of the movement and returns.

The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position overhanging to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312d, and is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center portion on the front side.

The vibration guide members 313 are arranged on the front side at a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) light guide members 313a, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end portion. It mainly includes a first sensor member 313c of the photocoupler type provided and a second sensor member 313d of the photocoupler type arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the back surface side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 so that the tip end portion thereof is arranged (closely arranged) with respect to the lens member 317. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operating direction, so that the vibrating member 314 is prevented. And, when the switch member 315 is tilted, it comes into contact with the light guide member 313a, and it is possible to prevent the light guide member 313a from being damaged.

The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) arranged on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swing posture of the swing operation member 310, which will be described later.

The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disk-shaped main body portion 314a having a cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole formed in the central portion, and a plurality of vibrating members 314 through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted. Switch support holes 314b (4 locations in this embodiment), a central tubular portion 314c that is cylindrically projected from the center of the main body 314a to the front side and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the main body portion 314a, and a sensor accommodating hole 314e bored in a shape capable of accommodating the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the main body portion 314a. It mainly includes a light guide hole 314f through which a light guide member 313a can be inserted.

The elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibration coil spring CS1.

Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the recessed portions formed at four locations on the outer peripheral portion.

The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member in which a large diameter portion 314d1 having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b is formed on the front side, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

The switch member 315 includes a main body portion 315a formed in a disk shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed overhanging the cup from the central portion of the main body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged in the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). The guide shaft 315e inserted through the 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the lower portion of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13) can pass through the gap between the first sensor member 313c and the guide shaft 315e. ), The plate-shaped detection piece 315 g, which is convexly provided on the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. As a result, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction close to the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

The intermediate member 316 is provided with a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fitted and fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is the XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in line.

As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body portion 333a formed as a rotary gear, a cylindrical tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body portion 333a, and a cylindrical portion thereof. A cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b and slightly shorter than the tubular portion 333b and having a hollow inside, and a cam portion 333c extending along the axial direction at the tip of the cylindrical portion 333b. A pair of notches 333d, a plate-shaped rib portion 333e that connects the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella that covers the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. The unit 333f and the like are mainly provided.

The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be displaced in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends inward (elastically deforms) to absorb the impact.

The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

The notch 333d is for making the phase relative to the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariant, and a pair of notches arranged facing each other are formed having different lengths in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by reversing it by 180 degrees.

The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the position most distant from the tubular portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the tubular portion 333b are connected to each other, so that the strength of the hollow cam portion 333c is the highest. It is possible to improve the strength of the weakened part. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. The portions can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress fatigue of the rib portion 333e while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), so that the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made to.

15 (a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15 (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15 (c) is an XVc-XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in a line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and is externally fitted to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). A diameter-expanded portion 334b that is connected to 334a and whose diameter is expanded toward the front side (upper in FIG. 15C) (the diameter is expanded in two steps) and the axial direction from the front end portion of the diameter-expanded portion 334b. It mainly includes a plate-shaped detection piece 334c extending to the surface and a detent projection 334d having a shape that matches the notch 333d.

The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to the annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly provided on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. By supporting the eccentric camshaft 331d2 on the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 from the inner peripheral side on the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric camshaft 331d2 is firmly supported. It can be supported and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when a load is applied from the radial direction.

The detection piece 334c is allowed to pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the detent projection 334d and the notch 333d mesh with each other to detect the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose phase is invariant relative to the phase detection member 334. can do.

16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 16 (c) is a side view of the lever member 340. 16 is a top view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line oriented in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and lower than the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A). ) Below). As a result, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is arranged on the open side of the U-shaped cross section. There is a slight gap between the raising member 353 and the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (lower side of FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). It is possible to increase the movement resistance when moving to.

As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the force of the applied load.

17 (a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position (a state in which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310).

18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 (b) is a portion of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 18 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 in the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). Further, FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18A. It should be noted that FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibration device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is directed in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side with the swing operation member 310 arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 hits the lower side surface of the release member 350. When the lock member 336 is brought into contact with the upper side surface, the release member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is oscillated about the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is opposite to the release member 350 at the portion where the lock member 336 stops the release of the release member 350. When is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the release member 350 is dampened by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in design.

In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 and the tubular portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only when is in contact with the peeling member 350.

In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the tubular portion 333b. ..

Therefore, when the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the release member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the release member 350. It is abutted on the side surface of. Therefore, when an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from the state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back surface side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load of pushing backward. Have together.

By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, in a state where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. The 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. By making it possible, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 does not swing from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thereby, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 in the XX-XX line of FIG. 17 (b). The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312, and is urged by a coil spring in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312, so that a pushing load (directed upward in FIG. 20). The detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d in a state where the load is not applied. On the other hand, a pushing load (load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pushed in.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 21 (a) illustrates a state in which the vibration device 366 operates from the states of FIGS. 18 (a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, and FIG. 21 (b) shows FIG. 18 (a). ) And the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 19 is shown.

As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibrating member 314 is the vibrating coil spring CS1. Is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 side (lower side in FIG. 21A).

From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pressed. As a result, the lens member 317 externally fitted and fixed to the vibrating member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is in contact with the switch member 315, it becomes difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, inaccessible state).

On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

Further, since the lens member 317 is configured to be in a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is immovably fixed and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

For example, when the player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the lens member 317 intermittently, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a). ), The swing operation member 310 receives a load in a direction close to). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

As a method of constructing the non-pushable state, a method of locking the lens member 317 with a hook-shaped claw or a vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to bring the lens member 317 to the terminal position. An example is a method of projecting (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device 366 vibrates the lens member 317 and makes the lens member 317 in an inaccessible state. Both effects can occur.

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the force of the electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slowed down. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the vibrating member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1. 21 (b) moves downward in accordance with.

As a result, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be increased in speed without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step portion 317a formed on the back surface side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member The 317 and the vibrating member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317.

After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the push-in coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed in (see FIG. 18A).

That is, the push-in coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, and the vibration coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibration member 314 can be composed of different members.

In the present embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 22A and 22B, a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side is shown, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 22 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed toward the back side (right side of FIG. 22 (b)) from the state of FIG. 22 (a) is shown.

The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 22 (a)) for lifting the swing operation member 310 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22 (a)) from the state of FIG. 22 (a), the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped by the lever member 340 coming into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of points to be contacted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed and the lever member 340 can be prevented from being damaged. .. Hereinafter, each contact point will be described in detail.

Since the angle control rod member 346 is inserted through the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the angle control rod member 346 abuts on the end of the guide support holes 331e1,332e1 to stop the swing of the lever member 340. Can be done. As described above in FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction when the lever member 340 is stopped. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. A step portion 344c1 which is a portion perpendicularly in contact with the upper cover 322 is formed in the connecting portion 344c, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be alleviated. can.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight of the lever member 340 as a whole can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) for driving the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition to the role of cushioning the impact, the upper cover member 344 also has a role of preventing dust and balls (game ball, game medium) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that dust is inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 22A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction by using the upper cover member 344.

The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis in the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12) is arranged between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be alleviated by the cushioning member 364. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

The angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as the angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibration device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, which is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 and vibrates the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

Similarly, the force applied to the lens member 317 in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

The vibrating device 366 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibrating device 366 operates is in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341. Be directed. Therefore, the vibration of the vibration device 366 can cause the main body member 341 to swing in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being loaded by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is pushed in. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed toward pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load on the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310.

In the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since this angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibration device 366 can be made smaller than the state of FIG. 22A. Therefore, by pushing in the swing operation member 310, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. 22 (b) by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the mode of vibration felt by the player who is pushing and operating the swing operation member 310 can be set. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of vibrations, that is, vibration in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibration in which the swing operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363.

23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a figure. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the main body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336. The cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of a load (a load equal to or greater than the attractive force due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a predetermined amount or more of the load (due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is peeled off from the magnet member 354 and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. 23 when a load equal to or greater than the attractive force is applied. As a result, a large load is applied between the lock member 336 and the release member 350, and it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 and the release member 350 from being damaged.

The eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the eccentric cam member 333 is on the side. Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 23B, by moving the sensor detection piece 343b from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, it is possible to detect that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

In this case, the attractive force generated by the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings too much, which may cause a load on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the back side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and are brought into contact with each other, so that the lever member 340 is contacted. Even if it turns too much, the load can be alleviated by deforming the back side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

By releasing the load applied downward by the player from the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the main body member 341 is swung clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 to cause the main body member 341. Is adsorbed again on the peeling member 350. As a result, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 shakes the main body member 341 when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. It does not depend on the direction of movement.

That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes depending on the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swinging operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closed side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are moved. When frictional resistance occurs between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam is in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336, so that the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again to form the main body. It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

24 (a) and 24 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 24A, a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22A to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24A) is shown, and in FIG. 24B, FIG. The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is shown. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 has swung to the release side, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335, and the lever member 340 is swung. Can be made to. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1 (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, the player's attention can be easily attracted to the swing operation member 310.

When the vibration device 366 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, since the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the operation of the vibration device 366.

Consider a case where the lens member 317 is pushed in and operated. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed in (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). a) There is a possibility that the swing operation member 310 may swing (counterclockwise) or the swing operation member 310 may be pushed in (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)).

In the present embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 acts, so that a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the eccentric cam member 333.

25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 25 (a) illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 25 (b) shows FIG. 24 (b). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged to the front side (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp and push down the swing operation member 310. That is, when a force is applied to the direction M1 (see FIG. 25 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b) in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swinging operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without swinging around the 363).

Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be forced to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. FIG. In 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. That is, it is possible to receive the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333 and prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can continuously rotate the lever member 340 regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the features in the rotation direction will be described.

FIG. 25 (a) shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “evacuation phase”) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24 (a)). Indicates the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 in a clockwise rotation.

FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle of the eccentric cam member 333 from the phase (evacuation phase) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by rotating counterclockwise. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracting phase is the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 and the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333. The period of facing each other (the period of the angle φ1 in the angle) can be shortened as compared with the case of rotating the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise (the period of the angle φ2 in the angle).

Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 face each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be closer than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 abut is reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310, a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333, so that the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25 (b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25 (b), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes long), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25 (a), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 becomes large (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 to the contact position becomes shorter), but since the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed at the contact position of the eccentric cam member 333, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 26 (a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 26A, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 is shown, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is shown. The view is omitted.

Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is requested while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26A. It usually does not occur that the swing operation member 310 swings in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) without the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Can be prevented.

At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated counterclockwise as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

27 (a) and 27 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 27 (a), the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 27 (b), the swing operation is performed from the state of FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise around the shaft support rod 363, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27 (a) from the state of FIG. 24 (a), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27 (a), the posture of the lever member 340 remains the same, and the swing operation member 310 is centered on the shaft support rod 363. Can be rocked. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the directions of the forces without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating), so that the operation device 300 can be operated. Can be easy.

During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state of being fixed by the attractive force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), so that it is possible to suppress the change in the operational feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, so that the lever member 340 is counterclockwise to FIG. 27 (b). The load is applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed to the position shown in FIG. 27 (a) when the swing operating member 310 is swung, and the swing operating member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. 27 (b). Can be facilitated.

Next, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. It is formed of a separate member from the main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, a urging force acts in the direction of raising the lever member 2340 from the torsion spring SP21, and at the same time, in the direction of backward rotation of the swing operation member 310 from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). The urging force works.

The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is abutted against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle control rod member 346. It is abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction of raising the swing operation member 310.

The torsion spring SP22 is wound and supported by a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341.

28 (a) and 28 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 28B, the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28 (a) is set as the initial position, and in FIG. 28 (a), the posture P21 in which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, although the operation device 300 in the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, it will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that operates each other in a manner in which a pair of members are brought apart from each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around the periphery. The bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, has a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. It mainly includes a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is made of a magnetic material.

The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are shorter in radial length than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) Arranged apart from the left side).

Here, when the swing operation member 310 is arranged as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold the lever member 2340 for the purpose of staging. However, it was difficult to detect whether or not the player gripped the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time, but if the push button operation is frequently requested, the push button must be pushed with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button, so that the player must push the push button. May be stressful.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is arranged apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swing member 2360 swings back and forth due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366, and the neck swings. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a mode of reciprocating and swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28 (a) and the posture P21. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), so that the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20) is used. By detecting with (see), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310.

On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d is detected. Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

Since there is no reaction force generated when the swing operation member 310 is gripped, the force required for the player is small. Further, it is sufficient that the swinging operation member 310 is covered with the player's hand (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). For example, the player puts the weight of the hand on the intermediate frame member 312. It is possible to reduce the stress of the player because it is only necessary.

As a result, whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not it is in the preparation stage for operation) can be performed without requesting the player to operate the push button. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress of the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swing member 2360 is used as an axis support, the vibration transmitted to the player side is increased by aligning the central axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366 with the rotation axis of the swing member 2360. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the central axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rod-shaped member 2331d includes an unlocking shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28A) extending in parallel with the eccentric camshaft 331d2.

29 (a) and 29 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position while the lock member 2336 is placed on the release side. Further, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)).

Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is maintained in a state of being pressed against the upper cover member 344.

When a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swing operation member 310 from the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29 (a)), the swing operation member 310 moves. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). As a result, the player can be made to recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally passes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied.

In the present embodiment, both the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) does not need to be arranged, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the unlock cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). In addition, in FIG. 30C and FIG. 30D, the main body member 2333a is partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the cam member 2333b has a cylindrical portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A pair of cuts extending along the axis in the axial direction and formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 2333b1 and having a hollow inside, and a pair of cuts cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the tubular portion 2333b1. A plate-shaped rib portion 2333b4 that connects the notch 2333b3, the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in the direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 are projected from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1. Mainly includes a convex portion 2333b5.

The convex portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position radially separated from the tubular portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The convex portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape whose side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30A) are arranged so as to intersect the radial direction of the tubular portion 2333b1 along a circular shape centered on the tubular portion 2333b1. Is formed by.

The tubular portion 2333b1 corresponds to the tubular portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical ideas are common, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center thereof. A disk-shaped disk portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disk portion 2333a1. It mainly includes an annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material material is arranged in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

The distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22, and the radial width of the annular recess 2333a3 is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to that of the modified R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the concave depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the convex portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the lever member 2340 to the cam member 2333b are disposed. When an overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives a load in a direction in which the convex portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to suppress deterioration due to rubbing between the magnets.

31 is a view in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31 (b) is a front view of FIG. 31 (b). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 in the XXXIb direction view of a), and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. Note that FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a). In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the convex portion 2333b5 is a circle. It is inserted through the ring recess 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts in the direction of attracting each other between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

At this time, the shape of the convex portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the tubular portion 2333b1, and the area in contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased. The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force equal to or greater than the suction force, the cam member 2333b is slid against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is in a state where the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By being fixed and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), it is possible to change the state so that the reference line O and the straight line Q21 are out of phase.

32 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlocked cam member 2339 in the XXXIIc direction view of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the unlock cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the main body is formed with gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b on the outer peripheral surface. A shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the portion 2339a and the main body portion 2339a and into which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending outward along the front side surface of the main body portion 2339a. Along with this, a release portion 2339c formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extended radially outward at a position of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. Mainly equipped with 2339d.

The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap of a detection sensor (not shown). As a result, the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be detected.

33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 in the XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member for preventing the lever member 2340 from swinging, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a whose tip side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and on the base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and a lock release cam member of the main body portion 2336a. It mainly includes a locking portion 2336d that protrudes above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side facing the 2339 (left side in FIG. 33 (b)).

The main body portion 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that abuts from the lower side of the lever member 2340) formed in the shape of an L-shaped hook abuts on the lever member 2340. It is considered to be an aspect.

The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 2336c can define the swing end of the lock member 2336.

The locking portion 2336c is a portion pushed from the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the lock member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the unlock cam member 2339, which show in chronological order that the lever member 2340 swings due to the rotation of the drive gear 335b. Is.

In FIG. 34 (a), the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (b), the lock release cam member 2339 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state of being rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (c), the state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 to the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) is shown. FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position.

Further, in FIG. 35A, a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 abuts on the lever member 2340 on the side surface on the opposite side (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees) of the tubular portion 2333b1 is shown. 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above. The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 before it comes into contact with the locking portion of the lock member 2336, the unlocking cam member 2339 needs to rotate at an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until it rotates only to the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the unlocked cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

In this way, since the cam member 2333b can rotate relative to the main body member 2333a, even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is a lever member. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by the 2340.

After the unlock cam member 2339 is rotated by the angle θ21, the unlock cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the unlock side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released, so that the eccentric cam member 2333 can be used. The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by a magnetic force and rotate integrally.

When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 is pulled out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34 (d)), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is thereafter regardless of the timing. (Fig. 34 (a) right end) pushes the curved surface of the hook-shaped part of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336 to push the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowers the rear end of the lever member 2340. , The rocking is naturally regulated.

Therefore, for example, when the player operates in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34 (d) regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340. The swing is restricted by swinging the lever member 2340 to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture shown in FIGS. 35 (a) or 35 (b)).

Here, as a measure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed from an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming it is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is sagging or the shape is changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIGS. 34 (d), 35 (a), or 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. When an upward load is applied to (see 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slides against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swinging is regulated by being moved.

On the other hand, in this case, although the postures of the cam members 2333b are the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phases of the unlocked cam members 2339 may be different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, there is a problem that the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required to move the lock member 2336 to the release side by the lock release cam member 2339 is different again, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by detecting the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched. That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34 (b)), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched.

As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing at which the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), and the lever member 2340 can be matched. The timing of drive start can be easily matched.

Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillatedly arranged at the end on the backflip side (see FIG. 28 (a)), and FIG. A state in which the main body member 2361 is swing-arranged (see FIG. 28 (b)) is shown, and in FIG. 36 (c), the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). The state of being slid and moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxially supported by the shaft support rod 363 with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a formed by the shaft hole 361c, the elongated hole 2361f formed along the extending direction of the fixing plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c, and the fixing plate portion 361e extending from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. It mainly comprises 2361 g of elongated holes formed along the direction.

Thereby, unless at least the main body member 2361 is oscillated at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 only swings around the shaft support rod 363.

Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362. It is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing the state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). For ease of understanding, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c).

As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upper side of FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the side, and a U-shaped member 2362d formed in the rod-shaped portions 2362c so as to be slidable and having a crotch width larger than the width of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Mainly prepared for.

The side wall portion 2362b includes an elongated hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged so that the crotch width direction of the U-shape is along the width direction of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged in a direction away from the main body portion 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Will be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. , The shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the elongated holes 2361f, 2361g.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction close to the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (c), and the U-shaped crotch portion is formed. Since it overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361 g, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361 g.

That is, by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

Here, a member that slides and moves the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped first release member 2370 is arranged inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310. A plate-shaped second release member 2380 is mainly provided so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the through hole to be disposed.

The first release member 2370 is arranged so that the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28 (a)) can be slidably moved, and the second release member 2380 is the U on the front side (left side in FIG. 28 (a)). The character-shaped member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

Further, in the first release member 2370, when the release member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end portion of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. It is said to be a shape. In the second release member 2380, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, the swing member 2360 rotates and is arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is arranged on the second release member 2380. The shape is such that it abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid and moved, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid. Since the 2362d is not slid, the swing operating member 310 cannot be slid downward.

38 (a) and 38 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 38 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28 (a) and arranged in a downward position. Further, FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361 g from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a).

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position and is rotated and arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and moved, and the swinging operation member 310 can be slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. Further, a downward force is applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it can be determined that the player does not accidentally apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. can.

Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) with a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from overloading the swing operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operating device 2300 from being destroyed.

When the swing operation member 310 is not overloaded, the swing operation member 310 can be prevented from sliding and moving, so that the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g provide a feeling of operation of the swing operation member 310. It can be prevented from changing.

Next, the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be driven is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward from the torsion spring SP31, and the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward from the torsion spring SP32.

The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is abutted against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle control rod member 346. It is abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 tilts forward.

The torsion spring SP32 is wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end portion is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in a rising direction with respect to the main body member 341.

39 (a) and 39 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 according to the third embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 3300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. Hereinafter, the solenoid mechanism will be described.

The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic material member 3339 formed from a magnetic material material arranged inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340. ..

The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearwardly and downwardly from the left and right ends of the rear guide portion 345a and integrally molded with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e thereof. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and a current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending in pairs from the front side wall to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the inner cover member 3330. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the N pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the S pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight vertical gap from the locus in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves with the swing of the lever member 3340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic material member 3339 when the lever member 3340 swings.

Here, for example, when an electric current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 39 (a), an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the rear (right side in FIG. 39 (a)). Further, when a current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of tilting forward, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

When the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of tilting forward as in the present embodiment, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 to the side where the lever member 3340 is close to the player when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is arranged so as to leave a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b).

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. 40 (b), the neck The swing operation member 310 does not move up immediately and is maintained in place.

Here, assuming that the urging direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if it is possible to prevent the above, the swing operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player does not notice that the overload is applied, and the swing operation member 310 is repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. Can be kept in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the rod-shaped member 3345f can swing the main body member 341 by receiving an electromagnetic force.

Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the peeling member 350, the lever member is provided by the lock member 336. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the swing of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for the swing of the main body member 341 and the swing of the peeling member 350. Since it is not used for motion, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), and FIG. 41 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41 (a). Therefore, the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340 The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

FIG. 41 (a) shows the main body member 341 by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345 f from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31 toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 40 (b). The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be obtained by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b).

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

Further, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40A), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed to incite the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300. Can perform actions. At this time, since the path for the rod-shaped member 3345f to move is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 with a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to deal with the case where the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

It should be noted that the weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if a small current is applied, the speed of the fanning operation can be different. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

42 (a) and 42 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without being viewed in cross section, and the player's hand is shown in an imaginary line for ease of understanding. ..

FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side (right side of FIG. 42 (a)) of the swing operation member 310. From this state, the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), and the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction. Due to the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42 (a)). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting it with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

In this case, the player can perform the input operation simply by putting his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the timing at which the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) in which a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player covers the hand swings in the forward rotation direction). Can be controlled. Therefore, without asking the player for an input operation, the hand is placed on the swing operation member 310, and the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f are controlled, so that the input of the back button 312d is performed on the control side. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at the right time.

Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310 but simply puts his / her hand on the lens member 317, for example, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). Even if the swing is made, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42 (a)). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for inputting in a timely manner, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

This is not possible in the form in which the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below and behind the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is provided on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

Next, the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 restricts the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has a neck. The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 that is pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2, and a lock member 4336 that is pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. Although the arrangement and posture of the drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, they are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d that are projected to the right from the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape.

The rod-shaped member 4331d is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The lock shaft 4331d3 is mainly provided.

The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 with both sides.

The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is formed larger than that of the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position with the end of the cam portion 4333c aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to a certain size.

The lock member 4336 is arranged from the lower side with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side on which the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340 is arranged is arranged upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a).

The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in the shape of a long plate and a transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section and in which the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by the meshing of gears. , Mainly prepared.

The main body member 4336a is formed in a long plate-shaped main body portion 4336a1 and the main body portion 4336a1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A), and a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted therein. The shaft support hole 4336a2 to be formed, the locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b, and the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. Mainly includes a recessed portion 4336a4 recessed from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 44B) to the front surface side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion where the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion being locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c is locked (see FIG. 45). As a result, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. By setting the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back surface side to be equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is put into a lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of the 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (the posture is held while the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a fan shape in cross section and a gear portion meshed with a drive gear 337b formed on a curved surface portion, and the main body portion 4336b1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted and a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b through a gap of a sensor member (not shown), and a main body. Mainly includes a convex portion 4336b4 which is projected from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 on the side facing the main body member 4336a and which is brought into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

The convex portion 4336b4 is formed at the back end side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. As a result, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction close to the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back surface side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. can.

45 (a) and 45 (b) are side views of the lock member 4336. In FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled arrangement.

The lock member 4336 can be configured as a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45 (a) and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

Further, in the lock forced release state, the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in a direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not abut on the lever member 4340. In the locked forced release state, the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b abuts on the concave portion 4336a4 to maintain the posture of the main body member 4336a.

If the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a from above in the lock standby state, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 47 (a)). If the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 can be swung (see FIG. 48).

Here, by putting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically regulated as the end portion on the contact side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

FIG. 46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a lock receiving member 4350 coaxially supported with a shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341. Is mainly composed of.

The main body member 4341 is arranged in a manner of compensating for the front main body portion 4341a which is formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section and has a notch on the left side of the rear end portion (left side in FIG. 46) and the notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 that attracts the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when it is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section and the current is conducting. And a pair of shaft holes 341b bored in the left-right direction in the substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1.

The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and the main body portion 4351 and the front end portion of the main body portion 4351 in the left-right direction. Mainly includes a shaft hole 4352 which is formed in the shaft hole 341b and coaxially supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward with respect to the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 4300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 is abutted against the lever member 4340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 from below, the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 with the strength of the lock member 4336. Can be done.

When the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3, the lock member 4336 is prevented from swinging toward the lock forced release state (see FIG. 45B). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts forward (leftward in FIG. 47 (a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged. can.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state from the state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47 (a)), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 The lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so that the degree of freedom of production is reduced. There was a problem of

It is also possible to variously change the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340, and to link the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340 to diversify the operating speed. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at a high speed. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) at the timing of swinging the lock member 4336 toward the locked forced release state. It is preferable to detect with.

Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. Thereby, for example, by vibrating the vibrating device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction, and the lever can be pushed back. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

49 (a) and 49 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rearward (FIG. 49) from the state of FIG. 49 (a). The state of being pushed toward 49 (a) to the right) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member 310 is omitted.

In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the locked forced release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of grasping the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state of FIG. 49 (a), the lock member 4336 does not regulate the swing of the lever member 4340, so that the game is played. When the person releases the hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is shown in chronological order. To.

50 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50 (b), the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the swing is restricted. Illustrated, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51 (a) to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50 (a)).

As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swing operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

The lock member 4336 is put into a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of tilting backward (see FIG. 50 (b)). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged in the direction of tilting forward by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45), when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force under the lever member 4340. Enter the side (see FIG. 51 (a)). In this way, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 by arranging the swing operation member 310 in the downward position. You can do it for sure.

In an arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51 (a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 comes into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51 (a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction and returned, but is continuously rotated in the same direction to obtain the eccentric cam. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device that detects the timing at which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the reverse direction, and it is possible to easily control the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 52, by reciprocating the eccentric cam member 4333 around the center of the eccentric camshaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung around the center of the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

At this time, by reciprocating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a state of being arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep the distance long. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

Further, by setting the lock member 4336 to the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being applied a load from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. It is possible to suppress the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43).

53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members in the direction of LIIIb of FIG. 53 (a). It is a side view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. Note that FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 swings in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung.

On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative positions (angles) of the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 change (see FIG. 53 (c)).

54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operating device 4300 viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 in the first embodiment are shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment has the same appearance as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. The description will be given assuming that the 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

Here, in the operation device 4300, the extension length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the swing operation member 310 is projected toward the front side by a distance X41 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

In this case, the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 4010 is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b). Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. 54 (b). The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the condition. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off in a state where the lock member 4336 regulates the swing, the swing operation member 310 even if an external force is applied to the swing operation member 310. There is a problem that the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be put in the packing box.

Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position in the inspection line of the factory or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously arranged in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in this state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost by turning off the power. Therefore, by turning off the power, the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described, but in the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are a single drive motor 335a. Driven synchronously with. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 is a cylindrical unlocking shaft arranged with the eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric camshaft 331d2 and the drive gear 335b behind the eccentric camshaft 331d2. It mainly includes a 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 pivotally supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a lock member 5336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. 56 (c) is a bottom view. FIG. 56 (a) is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIc direction view.

As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D-shape in front view, and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially disposed.

The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape in front view, has a linear shape and extends to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has high rigidity as compared with the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the rigid body portion 5333c1. It is mainly provided with a cushioning portion 5333c2 which is low in diameter and cushions the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to be substantially three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed so as to be able to withdraw the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is operated. There is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance because the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be swung.

In the present embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined by using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side (lower side of FIG. 56B) of the main body portion 333a, the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In the state, when the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

57 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 5339, and FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), FIG. 57 (c). ) Is a side view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIc direction view of FIG. 57 (a).

As shown in FIG. 57, the unlock cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. 5339a, a shaft hole 5339b formed in the center of the main body 5339a and into which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 5339a. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Mainly prepare.

The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed so as to be able to withdraw the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the unlock cam member 5339.

When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (below FIG. 57B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In the state, when the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b when the unlocking cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the lock release cam member 5339 can be inserted into the lock release shaft 5331d5 only in the posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, the lock release cam member 5339 can be assembled in the correct posture.

58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, the lock member 5336 is composed of a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and the transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section (FIG. 44). See) is not required.

The lock member 5336 is formed in the main body member 5336a formed in the shape of a long plate and in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 58 (a)) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted therein. Mainly a shaft support hole 5336b to be formed, and a locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the main body member 5336a facing the unlock cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58 (a)). Prepare for.

The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c. The other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c of.

The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the locus of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. Mainly, a convex portion 5336a2 is provided along a circle centered on a shaft support hole 5336b on a side close to the lever member 4340 from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1.

The convex portion 5336a2 is inclined upward so that the lower end surface toward the tip end surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) on the convex portion 5336a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333.

59 (a) and 59 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) illustrates a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric. It is possible to prevent the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 from colliding with each other.

This is an unavoidable problem when the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment), and this is an unavoidable problem. It is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position as in the embodiment.

Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is mechanical. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can surely bring the lever member 4340 into contact with a specific position (position on the minor axis side, position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c) of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is a lever. Take the posture closest to the member 4340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 5333c from being damaged due to the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

Further, by arranging the cam portion 5333c on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be secured. That is, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate in synchronization with each other, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released ( This is a mode of synchronization in which the amount of movement) is secured to the maximum. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is achieved. Can be improved.

60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. In FIG. 60A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336 is arranged. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state, and in FIG. 60 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam is hit from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load in the rotation direction applied to the drive device becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 hit each other, it is better to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to increase the swing speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the effect of production can be improved.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven independently, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forced release state (see FIG. 48) in the state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and the player can operate the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward due to being pushed up by the 4333 and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is put into the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 can be moved. Rocking can be regulated.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 4336 from applying resistance to the lever member 4340 in a state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled synchronously, the posture of the member for driving the lock member 5336 (the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player.

For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 half a turn before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lock member 5336 is abutted against the lower side surface of the lever member 4340 whenever the player operates and the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction of tilting forward and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. , Regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 62).

However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when it reciprocates and swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. It may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can suppress the resistance given by the lock member 5336.

Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed to the unlocked state side. (FIG. 60 (a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns in the urging direction, and the lever member 4340 is in the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

Therefore, while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, the swing direction of the lever member 4340 can be regulated at an arbitrary timing.

The unlock cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)), and otherwise the driving force is different from that of the lock member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the lever member 4340.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), until the lock member 5336 is arranged in the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (posture in FIG. 59 (b)). To maintain.

Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). The eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60 (a)), the eccentric cam member 5333 is shown from the posture of a predetermined angle (FIG. 59 (b)). Even if it rotates (up to the posture of 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only filled, and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed from swinging. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60B, and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 is rotated to the arrangement where the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. To.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. Further, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 returns by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336.

Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the curved wall portion 5336a1 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340, so that the lock member 5336 is attached to the lever member 4340. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from the lever.

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured at a high rate, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61 (b)) can be secured at a high rate. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably restricted by the lock member 5336.

FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is pushed down by the player in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b).

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c centered on the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) while the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged in the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (the same direction (FIG. 62 clockwise). The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59 (a)) by rotating it counterclockwise (FIG. 62).

Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (FIG. 62). Rotating clockwise) causes the lever member 4340 to swing, and the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61 (b)) to regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. Can be done.

As a result, after the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric camshaft 331d2, so that the swing width of the lever member 4340 is secured. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

63 (a) and 63 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member that represent the operation of the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 63 (a) illustrates a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 63A, in the eccentric cam member 6333, in a state immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 abuts on the lock member 5336, the unlock cam member 5339 is in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. Along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric cam. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lock release cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of the release of the regulation of the lock member 5336.

Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

64 (a) and 64 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336.

In FIG. 64A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336 is arranged. In FIG. 64 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (a), and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is under the lever member 4340. The state of contact with the side surface is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340. Even if the eccentric camshaft swings, the swing is dammed by the eccentric camshaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 will not be damaged.

Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is the most). It is possible to shorten the period in which it is placed at the lower end). As a result, the period in which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a) can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

65 (a) and 65 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. It should be noted that FIG. 65 (a) illustrates a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (b) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Will be done.

Further, by further rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. This regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 65 (a), the unlock cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the lock member 5336 (the unlock portion 5339c of the unlock cam member is separated from the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of resistance from the lock member 5336 to the unlock cam member 5339, and it is possible to stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. Further, when the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 returns by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63 (a)).

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be largely secured, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61 (b)) can be largely secured. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably restricted by the lock member 5336.

In the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), consider a case where a load is applied from the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are operated in synchronization with each other. Therefore, when the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted from the lever member 4340. The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end portion is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the lock release cam accompanies the clockwise rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, since there is no possibility that the unlock cam member 5339 abuts on the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

In this embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 are at different positions in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). It is placed at a position that does not interfere in the parallel direction of the paper surface). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlocked cam member 5339 rotate in the proximity direction in FIG. 65 (a), they interfere with each other from the state of FIG. 65 (a). Since they pass each other, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 from being damaged.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly gives resistance to the lever member 340 has been described, but the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. A case where resistance is applied from the gear damper 7347 to the lever member 7340 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the swing of the peeling member 7350 is restricted by the lock member 336 and peeled from the lever member 7340. The state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66A, the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 disposed inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change, so that the lever does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the peeling member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is peeled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player necks). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel off the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and encourage the player to properly use the swing operation member 310.

For example, in the state of FIG. 66B, the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the state of being sucked and fixed, the operating resistance becomes small and the player can easily operate the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating device 7300 from being destroyed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock member 336, 2336, 4336, 5336 is pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, 5330 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. Further, FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to the right cover member (not shown) arranged in pairs with the left cover member 8331.

The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, the inner side surface is composed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 arranged on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1 and the inner side surface are smooth surfaces. The second slide hole 8331i2 is mainly provided and is arranged on the lever support shaft 331d1 side with respect to the first slide hole 8331i1.

The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-shaped slide plate 8370 arranged so as to slide and move along the inner side surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is provided with a shaft portion 8336f that is a cylindrical portion inserted through the shaft support hole 336b and penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is pivotally supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a mode of being separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67 (a)) in a state of facing each other. Mainly provided with a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that face-to-face contact with the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state of facing each other (see FIG. 68 (a)), and each side surface is slightly provided. It is composed of a curved rhombus.

As shown in FIG. 67A, the first side surface 8336f1a is formed from a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. Ru. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

In the state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not abut on the second slide hole 8331i2 and a predetermined distance is left, so that the lock member 8336 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370.

Note that FIG. 67B shows a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side. Even in this state, there is a slight gap between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It is possible to prevent the operation feeling from being impaired during the dynamic operation.

On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed side by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. This makes it easy to arrange the lock member 8336 on the fixed side at a desired position.

The slide plate 8370 includes a convex portion 8371 that is inserted through the slide hole 8331i and is projected in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that is rotated by the drive motor 8373 and meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Mainly prepare.

The convex portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. The slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 is swung while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350.

By driving the drive gear 8374, the drive motor 8373 makes it possible to arrange the lock member 8336 at the position on the release side (see FIG. 67 (a)) and the position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is a driving means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370, it slides and moves together with the slide plate 8370.

The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface, and the magnet portion 8372 is attracted to the peeling member 350 by the magnetic sensor MC1, or the peeling member 350 is separated from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not it is. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), whereby the lever is arranged. It is detected that the member 340 is located at the end of the swing range. Further, in the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state of FIG. 67 (a) and the state of FIG. 67 (b), the player swings the swing operation member 310. It is possible to detect that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main control device). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, which may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

In the embodiment in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member is in the process of swinging. It was difficult to fix the 340 with the lock member 336.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the swing of the lever member 340 is stopped by the lock member 8336 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It is possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be done. This will be described below.

68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), by rotating the drive gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the slide movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the release member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is used for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. The slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68 (a) even if a load in the vertical direction is applied to some extent.

From the state of FIG. 68A, when the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) downward to the swing operation member 310, It is peeled off from the peeling member 350 from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged by transmitting a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player to the lock member 8336.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of the moving range (in the middle of the moving range of the lever member 340), so that the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. However, by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from coming into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the upper range of the peeling member 350) is narrowed, so that the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the release member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. can.

69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69 (a), the lever member 340 and the release member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the release member is arranged with the lock member 8336 on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where the 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by a solid line, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is shown from the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (a). The state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides and moves together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (decelerated due to frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i) and peeling. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 may be separated from each other (see FIG. 69 (a) solid line portion).

In this case, the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and when the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the release member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The contact may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is immediately controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69 (b)), thereby peeling. The upper side surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower side surface of the member 350.

As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the release member 350 abuts on the lock member 8336 before the release member 350 abuts on the eccentric cam member 333, thereby moving downward. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the lock member 8336 is configured to slide and move together with the release member 350 as in the present embodiment.

That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lock member 336 is fixed on the fixed side depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B). Even if it is arranged in, the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude toward the peeling member 350 side rather than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. , The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged is not sufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the release member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (a state in which the release member 350 abuts on both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). By arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the release member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the upper side surface of the lock member 8336 is placed on the release member 350 rather than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the peeling member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves in such a manner that the maximum diameter portion approaches the release member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the release member 350. Because.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are entirely rigid has been described, but the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is attached to the swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340 from a coil spring. The elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is downward in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). The state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-shaped elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in pairs up and down near the swing operation member 310.

When the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to substantially the same length. In addition, in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 70 (a) (both contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swing operation member 310, the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered. It is set higher than the elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their expansion / contraction states (upper elastic connecting member). (Because the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the load is applied to the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the internal member of the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), FIG. 72 (a) and FIG. 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

Further, in FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position is shown, and in FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is shown in FIG. 71 (a) from the state of FIG. 71 (a). ), The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101 is shown. The state of being rotated by a large angle θ102 is shown, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. A drive gear 10335 is provided with an eccentric camshaft 10331i and is rotationally driven by a drive motor at a position separated from the eccentric camshaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the torsion spring-like torsion spring SP101 formed of an elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in a direction that pushes the swing operation member 310 downward.

As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly urged in such a manner that it is pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 to push down the rear end of the lever member 340. Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, it is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged by the sliding of the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 The load from the eccentric cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. The position is deviated from the rib portion 2333b4 of the above by a predetermined angle (position deviated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction of FIG. 71).

As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71 (a), the load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is applied to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 separates from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is arranged under the peeling member 350 so that the lever member 340 cannot swing any more (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is It is considered to be the terminal position).

When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. Further, when the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), the swing operation member 310 swings downward. By repeating the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and the counterclockwise rotation in this way, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. Further, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

When the swinging operation member is reciprocated up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), whereby the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 in the circumferential direction are the same. This is because it can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the release member 350 is restricted from moving by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player placing a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged in the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 from the state of FIG. 73 (a). From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Illustrated in.

In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340. .. As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (B)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is applied. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

When the player applies a load in the pushing-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). As a result, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player loads a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) on the swing operation member 310. Because it is necessary to do (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the lever member. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (fanned).

This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down, the reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swinging operation member 310, and the player feels the operation. Can be granted.

On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates and swings at high speed. This makes it possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to inform the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocated up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, which causes the player to perform an operation reaction force. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and it can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, it has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, it has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched depending on the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can be promoted to perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are structurally not related has been described, but the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is the swinging operation member 11310. The resistance at the time of swinging of the lens member 317 is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 according to the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, in FIG. 75 (a), a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to the load of pushing is shown, and in FIG. 75 (b), the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 75A, in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and a through hole is formed in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole is formed through the vibrating device 11366 and penetrating from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g that is inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and formed in the shape of a pair of leaf springs. ..

The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the torsion spring in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75 (b)). It is arranged at a position where the SP2 is sandwiched. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in the shape of a leaf spring, and in the state of FIG. 75B, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centered on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component in 75 (a) vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 11366.

As a result, the same vibration device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 11310 to attract the player's attention in the no-load state. It can be compatible.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 11310 increases due to the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described, but the operation device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361d of the swing member 360. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 according to the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, in FIG. 76 (a), a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to the load of pushing is shown, and in FIG. 76 (b), the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

In the intermediate frame member 12312, the opening at the center of the bottom portion 312a is enlarged with respect to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g in which an enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 is extended downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can come into contact with the regulating rod 365.

The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76 (a)), and the restricting rod is in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76 (b)). It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle control hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle control hole 361d, it is possible to suppress the swinging operation of the swing operation member 12310 centering on the shaft support rod 363. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component in 76 (a) in the vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 366.

As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 12310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is shrunk so that the swing operation member 310 can be stored rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10, and is a box for packing. When it protrudes from the box, the front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in the packing box.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 causes viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are suction-fixed. In this case, the resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operation feeling can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 come into contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position upwardly separated from the eccentric cam member 4333.

In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform a fanning operation in which the swing operation member 310 is reciprocated up and down.

Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the fanning operation can be performed. Moreover, even if the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the fanning operation, the lock member 4336 can restrict the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to restrict the swing of the lever member 340, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is arranged from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other. It may be inserted into the lower side of the rear end portion of the lever member 340.

In this case, since it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that fits under the lever member 340, the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in an intermediate posture in the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side.

In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted, so that the player can operate the lever member 340. As a result, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that the momentum is applied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from colliding vigorously with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

Further, for example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player notices that the swing operation member is heavy. There can be time to ease the load on the 310.

On the other hand, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the peeling member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged in information rather than the intermediate position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not abut on the release member 350). It may be arranged in.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is made larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that the elastic recovery is performed. The lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward in the later state. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<An example of a technical concept in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player and a restricting member that regulates the movement of the moving member, the moving member is provided by the player. The operation member to be operated and the regulated member connected to the operation member and capable of restricting the movement by the restricting member are provided, and the regulated member is restricted from moving by the restricting member. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the shape of the moving member is deformably configured by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a restricting member by a manual operation by a player (for example,). See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player applies an overload to the moving member in a state where the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the regulating member through the moving member, and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of restricting movement to the regulating member, and is regulated. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the restricting member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. By doing so, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

The structure of the moving member that realizes the deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the load is, for example, a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, or a structure in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. An example is a configuration in which each part is attracted by a magnetic force.

In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player applies an overload to the operating member. The greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more the player applies an overload to the operating member, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by a magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member is not applied until a load greater than the attractive force is applied. The shape of is deformed. As a result, when operating normally with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the operation of the moving member can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member is relatively movable with respect to the regulated member by being loaded with the load of the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member can be configured, so that the operating member can be operated in the fixed state. It is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member in the non-transmission state while ensuring the property.

In the gaming machines A1 and 2, a support member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first axis arranged on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 and 2, it is possible to suppress a large load from being applied between the regulating member and the regulated member by operating the operating member, and the regulating member or the subject can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

The gaming machine A4 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a swinging direction, and the urging force is applied to the operating member side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operating member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the addition of urging force. This makes it possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner of connecting the operating member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand or contract in the fixed state, but the operating member is not transmitted. An example is the case where the spring member between the regulated member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the regulated member becomes large, so that an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulated member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in the direction of tilting the operating member forward, and the fixed state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the moving member is restricted from swinging by the restricting member.

Here, if the urging direction of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, the operating member is separated from the regulated member and regulated when the player applies a downward overload to the operating member. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the overload is applied and the operating member may be repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the direction of urging the operating member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward, so that the operating member is tilted downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operating member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first axis is arranged laterally in the longitudinal direction, the urging force of the first urging member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement in the fixed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the restricting member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the operating member is directed in a direction to be raised, and a downward load is applied to the operating member to form a non-transmission state, so that the player can operate the operating member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to form a non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operating members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

In the gaming machine A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. It is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating viscous resistance, and is characterized in that the gear portion disposed on the operating member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the higher the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. .. Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is small (the return speed of the operation member is small) is suppressed, and for example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. The resistance can be increased.

As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the design of the first urging member is free. The degree can be improved.

The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A8, the gear damper is arranged in a manner in which a viscous resistance is generated in the relative movement of the operating member and the regulated member.

Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operating member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operating member.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operating member only when the player applies a load to the operating member so that the regulated member and the operating member form a non-transmission state. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the operation member and encourage the player to use the operation member appropriately.

For example, the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the operating member.

Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operating member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being destroyed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmitting member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member receives a load and is described. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is arranged at a position where the load is not transmitted when the fixed state is changed to the non-transmission state.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state, the load is not transmitted to the transmission member. , It is possible to suppress damage to the transmission member and improve the durability of the transmission member.

The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member is the position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received, or the position in which the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received. In some cases, a position in which the moving member moves and is separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, when the swing of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member, even if the driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging the regulated member and not for rocking the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulated member from being damaged.

In the gaming machines A2 to A11, the operation member is arranged in the second position as compared with the case where the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. The moving member is restricted from moving by the restricting member when the moving member is arranged at the second position, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the fixed state is configured by being used.

Here, since the width of the operating member overhanging outward is smaller when the swing of the operating member is restricted at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing a gaming machine, the operating member is controlled at the first position. The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the fixed state.

On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swing of the operating member is restricted at the second position, the operating member cannot be moved from the second position and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed in the first position on the inspection line of a factory or the like, the operation member is mistakenly placed in the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, even if the moving member is restricted from moving at the second position where the operating member overhangs, the operating member and the regulated member are restricted. Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, it is possible to release the fixing between the operating member and the regulated member by turning off the power supply. As a result, the operating member can be easily arranged in the first position, the gaming machine can be stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be facilitated.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a moving member that generates a driving force generated from the driving device. A gaming machine including a transmission member for transmitting to, wherein the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the moving member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -144218 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is lowered, or the moving member is driven by the driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the drive device and the transmission member. It can be suppressed. Further, by driving, it is possible to suppress the moving member from giving a load to the player. Examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member rotated about the first axis.

Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide with each other. As the moving width of the moving member increases, the arm length of the transmitting member often becomes longer. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged due to the collision.
On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, when the moving member is driven in a portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is long. While ensuring the amount of movement, when colliding with the moving member, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which the portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is short is directed toward the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

The gaming machine B2 is provided with a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member are brought close to each other. The gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member, so that the moving member is moved by rotating the transmission member around the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier to attract the player's attention to the moving member.

In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is pivotally supported by a second axis extending in the left-right direction, which is an axis different from the first axis, and the moving member is operated by the player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween and under the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the transmission member is under the moving member in a state where the second axis is extended in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the direction of tilting forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmission member when the player pushes down the operating member. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the transmission member.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the operating member is provided with an effect member that produces an effect on the player.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the operating member is provided with an effecting member for producing an effect on the player, so that the operating member can attract the attention of the player.

Examples of the effect device for producing the effect on the player include a light emitting device such as an LED arranged on the board, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

In the gaming machine B5, the staging member includes at least a vibrating device that generates vibration, and a load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is directed in a direction in which the moving member is separated from the transmission member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by this.

Here, when the staging device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the staging member is provided with a vibrating device that causes at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is a moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, so that the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member can be reduced by the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the gaming machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, the vibrating device is arranged at a substantially central portion of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrated by the vibrating device is outside the operating member. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that it is connected to a shell as a rigid body.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is arranged in the substantially central portion of the operating member. Can secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. On top of that, the vibrating part vibrated by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, so that the vibration is directly applied to the fingers of the player who operates the operating member. I can tell. Therefore, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operating member is provided with a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is a second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with the shaft in between, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. Can be reduced.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the pushing member is configured to be in a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the pushing member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed in.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, a pushable state in which the push-in member can be pushed in and a push-in impossible state in which the push-in member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed in are configured. The effect on the moving member can be switched on the gaming machine side by the operation performed by the player.

For example, when a player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member intermittently, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the moving member receives a load in a direction close to the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the moving member also moves in a direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide with each other due to the operating member returning upward due to the urging force.

In addition, as a method of constructing a push-in impossible state, a method of locking the push-in member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to extend the push-in member to the terminal position. An example is a method (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the terminal position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device causes both the action of vibrating the pushing member and the action of making the pushing member in a pushable state. Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the side in which the rotation direction of the transmission member is separated from the first axis across the second axis is said. The gaming machine B10 characterized in that it is oriented in a direction facing the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is the direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis across the second axis. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second axis to the contact position between the moving member and the transmitting member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by a first shaft, and is pivotally supported and pivotally supported by a rotary gear to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving device and the first shaft. An eccentric cam that comes into contact with a member is provided, and a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear can move relative to the eccentric cam are configured. A game machine B11 characterized by being made possible.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is equal to or higher than the threshold value from the moving member. When a load is received, the load applied to the eccentric cam can be released from the moving member by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmissive state. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

The case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear can be configured in a non-transmission state is, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are attracted and fixed by a magnetic force, or the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are in the circumferential direction. An example is the case where the gears are fitted by friction.

<An example of the technical idea that the lock member that fixes the moving member is operated synchronously with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and an eccentric support to the first axis. A gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the moving member and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member causes the swinging of the moving member. It is possible to configure a regulateable standby state and a release state in which the restriction on the swing of the moving member is released, and the transmission member and the restricting member operate in synchronization with each other by the driving force of the driving device. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is oscillated by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member driven by a driving device. Under the urging force that moves the moving member in the direction close to the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, the swinging of the moving member is regulated during the swinging of the moving member, and the swinging of the moving member is regulated at a predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a restricting member to be released (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the minor axis side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side that comes into contact with the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swing of the moving member. It is possible to prevent damage to the transmission member when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, but if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed and the eccentricity is eccentric. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member may collide with the moving member on the major axis side and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. The posture of the transmission member when is in the released state can be mechanically determined. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with each other with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the restricting member is synchronously operated with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the restriction on the swing of the moving member, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the restriction is released. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is put into the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member by moving the moving member to a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, after the regulating member releases the restriction on the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for the swinging of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the regulating member moving together when the transmission member is rotated.

Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (release of the swing restriction of the moving member) can be performed.

In the gaming machine C2, when the restricting member is in the standby state, the restricting member is moved in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the restricting member, whereby the swing of the moving member is restricted. The moving member is made capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed from the swing locus of the outer peripheral portion of the moving member when the first operation is executed.

When the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member so that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a preliminary step for restricting the swinging direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to be restricted in the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, when the moving member executes the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. This makes it possible to suppress the load applied to the transmission member.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. It is composed of an eccentric cam, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved by a urging force toward the transmitting member, the inside of the cam portion of the transmitting member. The first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member, is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis, and the moving member is the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member and is arranged when the first side surface thereof starts to come into contact with the moving member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the restriction on the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, and the moving member moves with a urging force toward the transmission member. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member of the transmission member, is configured to be in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be secured to the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is secured immediately after the restriction on the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

In the gaming machine C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface on the opposite side of the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is better to prevent the large diameter portion from hitting the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmitting member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmitting member hit each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion because the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, so that the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, and the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved. Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released by the restricting member, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the transmission member is provided with a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates around the first axis, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member and moves following the rotation of the transmitting member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on the swing of the moving member is lifted. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<Example of technical concept in which the operation unit placed at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
The vibration device is provided with a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, and a vibration device that is arranged on the moving member and is capable of generating vibration. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of the moving member and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined to each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent problems such as shaking of the gaming machine due to the vibration of the vibrating device being transmitted to the gaming machine. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibrating device arranged on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is caused by the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Examples of the vibration device include a voice coil motor that constitutes vibration in the linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

The game machine D1 includes a drive device that generates a driving force that causes the moving member to swing, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, and the vibration device is in a linear direction. The gaming machine D2 is composed of a device that generates vibration, and the transmission member is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibrating device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is composed of a device that generates vibration in a linear direction, and the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second shaft disposed on the moving member, and the vibration of the vibrating device is supported. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a cushioning member for absorbing vibration is arranged on the second axis.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second axis arranged on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis and the cushioning member is arranged on the second axis, the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the cushioning member. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the moving member includes a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotational resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the vibrating device and secure a large vibration component, particularly when the player pushes the pushing member. Thereby, the state in which the vibrating device can easily rotate on the second axis and the state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, the gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed in, the vibrating device is vibrated and swung around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device, while when the pushing member is pushed in, the vibrating device swings. It is possible to increase the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player by suppressing the vibration. Therefore, the behavior of the vibrating device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through a position separated from the second axis. A game machine D6 characterized by being played.

When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as the shaft support, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased by matching the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device with the shaft support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is rotated by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration device and the vibration center axis of the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be utilized and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved by vibrating the vibrating device.

The gaming machine D6 includes a detecting device for detecting the vibration of the vibrating device, and the vibrating device is arranged on an operating member held by the player.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, a vibration device is arranged on the operating member gripped by the player, and the vibration device is provided with a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device, so that the vibration device vibrates. By grasping the operating member while the vibration is being performed, vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. This makes it possible to detect whether the player is holding the operating member (whether it is in the preparatory stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of moving members that perform fanning>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with an input device for the player to input and operate, and the input device is driven in a direction away from the player and is provided with an input unit which is a portion for performing an input operation.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a timing for operating an input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that they cannot concentrate on the game because they are distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglect the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in the direction of approaching the player and the player's fingers. By operating the input unit in a manner of pushing it back when it comes into contact with the machine, the timing of operation of the input unit can be determined on the gaming machine side.

Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

In the game machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device and the direction of operating the input unit coincide with each other, and the vibrating device is arranged at the input. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibrating device is pressed against the input unit, and the input unit is retracted from the input unit when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit can be operated, the vibrating device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

In the gaming machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device, so that the vibrating device is separated from the input device. The input unit can be operated with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning to the desired position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration that the player passively feels.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be grasped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm. The gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, an input device provided with an input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be grasped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input device is formed. Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while grasping it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the input device can be unnecessary.

Further, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, the operation of the input unit vibrating can be grasped only by the player who holds the input unit. As a result, it is possible to announce a big hit or the like in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that a locking portion for locking a finger is provided on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input portion side is received by the palm and the finger is hooked on the locking portion to generate the vibration by the vibration device. Can be trapped inside the palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of vibration felt by the player.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d 2nd sensor member (detection device)
317 Lens member (part of input device, input part, pushing member)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330 Inner case member (part of support member)
331d1 Lever support shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
331d2 Eccentric camshaft (1st axis)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336 Lock member (regulatory member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340 Lever member (part of moving member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (2nd shaft)
364 Cushioning member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Main body member (rotary gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall part (concave part)
CS1 vibration coil spring (second urging device)
CS2 push-in coil spring (first urging device)
M41 electromagnet member (electromagnet)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first urging member)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-120741

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the vibration transmission of the vibration device .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving vibration transmission of a vibration device .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a predetermined member that moves between the first position and the second position by the operation of the player, and is arranged on the predetermined member to generate vibration. A vibrating device, a urging means for urging the predetermined member toward the first position or the second position, a light emitting means, and a vibrated portion configured to be vibrable by the vibration of the vibrating device. The vibration direction of the vibration device and the movement direction of the vibration device due to the movement of the predetermined member are inclined to each other, and the light emitting means changes the emission direction of light with the movement of the predetermined member. It is configured so that light can be emitted toward the vibrated portion .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the vibration transmission of the vibration device can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member, and the swing member of a lever member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member in the XVc-XVc line of FIG. 15 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. 18A. It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in the XX-XX line of FIG. 17 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a side view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of the main body member, and (d) is a side view of the main body member in the direction view of the arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. .. (A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the direction view of XXXIIc. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a). (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of the main body member of the swing member illustrated in the axial direction view of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state which the U-shaped member was slid and moved from the state. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of the operation device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the lock member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17A. (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). It is a figure. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operating device viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view of. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. (A) to (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member showing the operation of the lock member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member. (A) and (b) are the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member showing the operation of the locking member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 8th Embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, so that a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening. The out openings are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a, 337a and a vibration device 366.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by the player, and the swing operation member 310 includes a storage recess 17a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area formed by the accommodation recess 15a recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the left-right direction of the unit 15 is movable.

There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recesses 15a and 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grip the swing operation member 310 in a manner of grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recess 17a is caught on the back side surface of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if the force is relaxed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from slipping off from the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player to maintain his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is in a downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment). ) Is shown, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

The accommodating recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged so as to be sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent the player from pinching a finger between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodation recess 15a and the accommodation recess 17a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts a finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and grips the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as the push button portion is arranged facing the palm, so that the player can push the vibrating member 310 by grasping and holding the swinging operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or changing the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where the player touches the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, finger, etc.), and the vibration is the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to perform an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be planned, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of not being able to concentrate can be solved.

Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether or not the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). Whether or not it is moving) is difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to notify only the player who holds the swing operation member 310 of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, so that the player can feel that he / she is operating.

When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311. By bending the back side frame member 311 in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7 (b). Even in a posture in which the wrist is stiffened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, it is possible to prevent the fingertip from coming off the back side frame member 311.

Further, by catching the fingertip on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, and the wrist naturally returns. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in a manner of releasing the return of the wrist. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310.

As shown in FIG. 6, compared to the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, from the upper end of the swing operation member 310. The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Thereby, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the shaft support rod 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to rotate (erroneously operate) the swing operation member 310 around the center of the shaft support rod 363, a large force can be required. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player when gripping the upper part of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310, and the player puts his / her hand on the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 and heads. It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, the swing operation member 310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed on the back side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover member 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover member 344,345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a convex portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, and a front cover 321 and an upper cover. The left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 and the inner case member 330 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left-right direction of the 322 are internally fitted. Mainly includes a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a overhanging and arranged inside the above.

By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief by disassembling the operation device 300.

The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2 thereof. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 in the form of a photocoupler, which is arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In addition, in FIG. 10, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 in which a lever member 340 is arranged inside in a box shape, and an eccentric cam projected from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, in which the relative phase between the eccentric cam member 333 and the eccentric cam member 333 is invariant. A first drive device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. A second drive device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the lock member 336, and a gear damper 338 that is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 340. , Mainly prepared.

The left cover member 331 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening formed to the right, and has a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left side portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side in front view (back side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extending to the right from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b to the front. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-shaped members that are projected to the right from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape. A 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331d protruding to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Mainly includes a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331 g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the wheel.

The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening formed to the left, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332b that is offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and extends to the left from the edges of the lower side wall portion 332a and the upper side wall portion 332b and is on the front side. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that is in contact with the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion and a pair of circular shapes are bored in the lower side wall portion 332a, and the gear portion of the second drive device 337 is formed. The drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, the plurality of insertion holes 332e bored in the upper side wall portion 332b, the sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and the upper side wall portion 332b stretched to the right. A bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 332g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular convex portion that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. Mainly equipped with 332i.

The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a 1/4 circular shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when the front side upper portion is viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are formed. The upper part on the front side is provided with notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction.

The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1 which is a swing shaft in the extending direction). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the 1/4 circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d has a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric camshaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the surface and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member on which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are inserted in a phase-aligned state.

The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted, the lock shaft 331d3 is a member to which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is pivotally supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is a lock. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. The gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and the drive member insertion hole 331e3, which is arranged below the rear side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed in a combination of a pair of circular shapes, are formed. Mainly prepare.

In the guide support hole 331e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted to guide the swing of the lever member 340, and the end of the swing of the lever member 340 is defined by the end portion.

The sensor member 331f detects that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f, and detects the posture of the lock member 336.

The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. Therefore, by adjusting the shape of each circle, the drive gear 337b of the second drive device 337 can be made large. The pedestal portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle in a state where the right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle.

As a result, the drive gear 337b is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported by the second drive device 337 (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the inserted second drive device 337 It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having the same diameter as the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 which is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and is guided by the angle control rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape arranged on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. The first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and the rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is arranged at a position rotated around the shaft support portion 332g. It mainly includes a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

The torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are arranged below the front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is abutted against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is abutted against the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 rises.

The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By externally fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, it is possible to firmly align the eccentric camshaft 331d2.

The first drive device 335 mainly includes a drive motor 335a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 335a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 335b is meshed with the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

The lock member 336 is a member for preventing the lever member 340 from swinging, and has a main body portion 336a whose tip end side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and a shaft formed on the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-like protrusion from the base end side of the main body portion 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the axial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d to be provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and allowing passage through a gap of the sensor member 331f.

The guide hole 336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 336c can define the swing end of the lock member 336.

The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 337b is meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that rotates in mesh, and the gear member is projected to the right side (inside the inner case member 330) of the left cover member 331 through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear thereof. The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives a viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. In FIG. 11, a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310 is shown, and the gear damper receiving member 342, the posture detection member 343, and the destruction prevention that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340 are shown. The state in which the peeling member 350 arranged as is disassembled is shown.

The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose visual outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is coaxially supported to form an axial outer shape in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detection member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits externally from above into the circular portion of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343, and the upper cover member 344 sandwiching the main body member 341. Coaxially with the lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, the angle control rod member 346 inserted into the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the tubular portion 343a of the posture detection member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341. It mainly includes a peeling member 350 that is pivotally supported, and a swing member 360 that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341.

The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a cylindrical tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. Further, the posture detecting member 343 is located at a position (inner side in FIG. 11) farthest from the cylindrical portion 343a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and the tubular portion 343a in the axial direction. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection piece 343b extending along the line.

The tubular portions 342a and 343a are portions to be inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted through the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

The gear portion 342b is a portion that is meshed with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10) and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion capable of detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

The peeling member 350 is a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and on the upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 arranged above the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed of a magnetic material.

Since the magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 so, it has a function of combining or separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a in the left-right direction, and a pair of shaft holes 341b thereof. The regulation hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b and the front end portion of the main body portion 341a are inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extension direction of the main body portion 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The regulation hole 341f and the like are mainly provided.

The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation rod member 346 is supported.

The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which the shaft support rod 363 that pivotally supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which the regulation rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. Is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the cushioning member 364 is arranged around the shaft support rod 363.

The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has an embodiment of forming a curved surface along a circle centered on a shaft hole 341b on the back surface side. The guide portion 344a is connected to the guide portion 344a, and the outer fitting portion 344b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portions 344a and the outside thereof. It mainly includes a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The connecting portion 344c is reduced in thickness (see FIG. 22).

The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. The back guide portion 345a is formed, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and the rear guide portion 345a sandwiching the outer fitting portion 345b. It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c arranged on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front surface guide portion 345d extending from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

The back guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the positional deviation of the swing member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d causes the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. It is suppressed that the position shifts to.

Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (made of a metal material) of the lever member 340 from directly contacting the lever member 340. That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 formed of the resin material between them, it is possible to alleviate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

The swing member 360 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and capable of swinging around the shaft hole 341e, and is located on the lateral side of the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a to be arranged and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a shaft support coaxially with the main body member 361 while being locked to a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361. A plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362 to be formed, a cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 thereof are internally fitted and outside the shaft hole 341e. The cushioning member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, the cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. 366 mainly includes a vibration device 366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface.

The main body member 361 is coaxially and circularly bored with a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall portion 361b connecting the side wall portions 361a at the front end, and a pair of side wall portions 361a. A shaft hole 361c in which the cushioning member 364 is installed, an elongated angle regulating hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulating rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a, and a side wall portion 361a. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e that is bent and formed in a direction away from each other on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b and to which the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

Since the outer shape of the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c with the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a. Can be rocked.

The shaft hole 361c is externally fitted and supported by the cushioning member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

The angle regulating hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. As a result, the impact when the regulation rod 365 abuts on the angle regulation hole 361d can be suppressed.

The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically locked to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 362a is locked by having a protrusion 362a1 projecting on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside, and the insertion portion 364a on the insertion tip side is formed to have a small diameter, and the root portion 364b is formed on the root side of the insertion portion 364a. Is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

Of those externally supported by the cushioning member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

The vibrating device 366 is a device that moves a pair of members close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and has a copper wire wound around it. A disc-shaped cylinder in which a certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

One end of the torsion spring SP2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in the direction of tilting with respect to the main body member 341.

FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. In addition, in FIG. 13, the illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the back side frame member 311 and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. A vibration guide member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are in phase with each other, and the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole in the central portion and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the central portion of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched. The switch member 315 arranged to face the vibrating member 314, the intermediate member 316 externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 thereof are housed on the back side and are externally supported by the vibrating member 314. The lens member 317 is mainly provided.

According to the above-described configuration, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. ..

The intermediate frame member 312 has a bottom portion 312a in the shape of an annular plate, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c erected on the bottom portion 312a, and a back button member 312d movably arranged on the upper part of the back surface side of the bottom portion 312a so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The bottom portion 312a includes a rectangular recessed portion 312a1 that is recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. This makes it possible to prevent the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operating direction when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress the generation of resistance in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. .. Further, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, it is possible to suppress the vibrating member 314 from tilting.

Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction and repeatedly collides with another member at the end of the movement and returns.

The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position overhanging to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312d, and is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center portion on the front side.

The vibration guide members 313 are arranged on the front side at a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) light guide members 313a, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end portion. It mainly includes a first sensor member 313c of the photocoupler type provided and a second sensor member 313d of the photocoupler type arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the back surface side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 so that the tip end portion thereof is arranged (closely arranged) with respect to the lens member 317. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operating direction, so that the vibrating member 314 is prevented. And, when the switch member 315 is tilted, it comes into contact with the light guide member 313a, and it is possible to prevent the light guide member 313a from being damaged.

The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) arranged on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swing posture of the swing operation member 310, which will be described later.

The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disk-shaped main body portion 314a having a cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole formed in the central portion, and a plurality of vibrating members 314 through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted. Switch support holes 314b (4 locations in this embodiment), a central tubular portion 314c that is projected in a cylindrical shape from the center of the main body 314a to the front side and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the main body portion 314a, and a sensor accommodating hole 314e bored in a shape capable of accommodating the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the main body portion 314a. It mainly includes a light guide hole 314f through which a light guide member 313a can be inserted.

The elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibration coil spring CS1.

Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the recessed portions formed at four locations on the outer peripheral portion.

The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member in which a large diameter portion 314d1 having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b is formed on the front side, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

The switch member 315 includes a main body portion 315a formed in a disk shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed overhanging the cup from the central portion of the main body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged in the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). The guide shaft 315e inserted through the 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the lower portion of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13) can pass through the gap between the first sensor member 313c and the guide shaft 315e. ), The plate-shaped detection piece 315 g, which is convexly provided on the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. As a result, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction close to the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

The intermediate member 316 is provided with a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fitted and fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is the XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in line.

As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body portion 333a formed as a rotary gear, a cylindrical tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body portion 333a, and a cylindrical portion thereof. A cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b and slightly shorter than the tubular portion 333b and having a hollow inside, and a cam portion 333c extending along the axial direction at the tip of the cylindrical portion 333b. A pair of notches 333d, a plate-shaped rib portion 333e that connects the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella that covers the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. The unit 333f and the like are mainly provided.

The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be displaced in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends inward (elastically deforms) to absorb the impact.

The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

The notch 333d is for making the phase relative to the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariant, and a pair of notches arranged facing each other are formed having different lengths in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by reversing it by 180 degrees.

The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the position most distant from the tubular portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the tubular portion 333b are connected to each other, so that the strength of the hollow cam portion 333c is the highest. It is possible to improve the strength of the weakened part. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. The portions can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress fatigue of the rib portion 333e while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), so that the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made to.

15 (a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15 (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15 (c) is an XVc-XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in a line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and is externally fitted to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). A diameter-expanded portion 334b that is connected to 334a and whose diameter is expanded toward the front side (upper in FIG. 15C) (the diameter is expanded in two steps) and the axial direction from the front end portion of the diameter-expanded portion 334b. It mainly includes a plate-shaped detection piece 334c extending to the surface and a detent projection 334d having a shape that matches the notch 333d.

The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to the annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly provided on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. By supporting the eccentric camshaft 331d2 on the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 from the inner peripheral side on the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric camshaft 331d2 is firmly supported. It can be supported and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when a load is applied from the radial direction.

The detection piece 334c is allowed to pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the detent projection 334d and the notch 333d mesh with each other to detect the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose phase is invariant relative to the phase detection member 334. can do.

16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 16 (c) is a side view of the lever member 340. 16 is a top view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line oriented in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and lower than the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A). ) Below). As a result, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is arranged on the open side of the U-shaped cross section. There is a slight gap between the raising member 353 and the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (lower side of FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). It is possible to increase the movement resistance when moving to.

As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the force of the applied load.

17 (a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position (a state in which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310).

18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 (b) is a portion of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 18 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 in the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). Further, FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18A. It should be noted that FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibration device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is directed in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side with the swing operation member 310 arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 hits the lower side surface of the release member 350. When the lock member 336 is brought into contact with the upper side surface, the release member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is oscillated about the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is opposite to the release member 350 at the portion where the lock member 336 stops the release of the release member 350. When is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the release member 350 is dampened by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in design.

In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 and the tubular portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only when is in contact with the peeling member 350.

In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the tubular portion 333b. ..

Therefore, when the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the release member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the release member 350. It is abutted on the side surface of. Therefore, when an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from the state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back surface side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load of pushing backward. Have together.

By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, in a state where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. The 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. By making it possible, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 does not swing from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thereby, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 in the XX-XX line of FIG. 17 (b). The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312, and is urged by a coil spring in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312, so that a pushing load (directed upward in FIG. 20). The detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d in a state where the load is not applied. On the other hand, a pushing load (load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pushed in.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 21 (a) illustrates a state in which the vibration device 366 operates from the states of FIGS. 18 (a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, and FIG. 21 (b) shows FIG. 18 (a). ) And the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 19 is shown.

As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibrating member 314 is the vibrating coil spring CS1. Is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 side (lower side in FIG. 21A).

From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pressed. As a result, the lens member 317 externally fitted and fixed to the vibrating member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is in contact with the switch member 315, it becomes difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, inaccessible state).

On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

Further, since the lens member 317 is configured to be in a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is immovably fixed and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

For example, when the player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the lens member 317 intermittently, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a). ), The swing operation member 310 receives a load in a direction close to). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

As a method for constructing the non-pushable state, a method of locking the lens member 317 with a hook-shaped claw or a vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to bring the lens member 317 to the terminal position. An example is a method of projecting (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device 366 vibrates the lens member 317 and makes the lens member 317 in an inaccessible state. Both effects can occur.

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the force of the electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slowed down. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the vibrating member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1. 21 (b) moves downward in accordance with.

As a result, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be increased in speed without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step portion 317a formed on the back surface side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member The 317 and the vibrating member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317.

After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the push-in coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed in (see FIG. 18A).

That is, the push-in coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, and the vibration coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibration member 314 can be composed of different members.

In the present embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 22A and 22B, a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side is shown, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 22 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed toward the back side (right side of FIG. 22 (b)) from the state of FIG. 22 (a) is shown.

The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in a direction (clockwise in FIG. 22 (a)) for lifting the swing operation member 310 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22 (a)) from the state of FIG. 22 (a), the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped by the lever member 340 coming into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of points to be contacted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed and the lever member 340 can be prevented from being damaged. .. Hereinafter, each contact point will be described in detail.

Since the angle control rod member 346 is inserted through the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the angle control rod member 346 abuts on the end of the guide support holes 331e1,332e1 to stop the swing of the lever member 340. Can be done. As described above in FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction when the lever member 340 is stopped. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. A step portion 344c1 which is a portion perpendicularly in contact with the upper cover 322 is formed in the connecting portion 344c, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be alleviated. can.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight of the lever member 340 as a whole can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) for driving the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition to the role of cushioning the impact, the upper cover member 344 also has a role of preventing dust and balls (game ball, game medium) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that dust is inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 22A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction by using the upper cover member 344.

The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis in the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12) is arranged between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be alleviated by the cushioning member 364. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

The angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as the angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibration device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, which is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 and vibrates the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

Similarly, the force applied to the lens member 317 in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

The vibrating device 366 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibrating device 366 operates is in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341. Be directed. Therefore, the vibration of the vibration device 366 can cause the main body member 341 to swing in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being loaded by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is pushed in. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed toward pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load on the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310.

In the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since this angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibration device 366 can be made smaller than the state of FIG. 22A. Therefore, by pushing in the swing operation member 310, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. 22 (b) by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the mode of vibration felt by the player who is pushing and operating the swing operation member 310 can be set. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of vibrations, that is, vibration in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibration in which the swing operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363.

23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a figure. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the main body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336. The cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of a load (a load equal to or greater than the attractive force due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a predetermined amount or more of the load (due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is peeled off from the magnet member 354 and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. 23 when a load equal to or greater than the attractive force is applied. As a result, a large load is applied between the lock member 336 and the release member 350, and it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 and the release member 350 from being damaged.

The eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the eccentric cam member 333 is on the side. Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 23B, by moving the sensor detection piece 343b from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, it is possible to detect that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

In this case, the attractive force generated by the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings too much, which may cause a load on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the back side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and are brought into contact with each other, so that the lever member 340 is contacted. Even if it turns too much, the load can be alleviated by deforming the back side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

By releasing the load applied downward by the player from the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the main body member 341 is swung clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 to cause the main body member 341. Is adsorbed again on the peeling member 350. As a result, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 shakes the main body member 341 when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. It does not depend on the direction of movement.

That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes depending on the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swinging operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closed side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are moved. When frictional resistance occurs between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam is in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336, so that the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again to form the main body. It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

24 (a) and 24 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 24A, a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22A to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24A) is shown, and in FIG. 24B, FIG. The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is shown. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 has swung to the release side, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335, and the lever member 340 is swung. Can be made to. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1 (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, the player's attention can be easily attracted to the swing operation member 310.

When the vibration device 366 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, since the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the operation of the vibration device 366.

Consider a case where the lens member 317 is pushed in and operated. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed in (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). a) There is a possibility that the swing operation member 310 may swing (counterclockwise) or the swing operation member 310 may be pushed in (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)).

In the present embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 acts, so that a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the eccentric cam member 333.

25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 25 (a) illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 25 (b) shows FIG. 24 (b). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged to the front side (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp and push down the swing operation member 310. That is, when a force is applied to the direction M1 (see FIG. 25 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b) in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swinging operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without swinging around the 363).

Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be forced to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. FIG. In 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. That is, it is possible to receive the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333 and prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can continuously rotate the lever member 340 regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the features in the rotation direction will be described.

FIG. 25 (a) shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “evacuation phase”) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24 (a)). Indicates the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 in a clockwise rotation.

FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle of the eccentric cam member 333 from the phase (evacuation phase) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by rotating counterclockwise. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracting phase is the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 and the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333. The period of facing each other (the period of the angle φ1 in the angle) can be shortened as compared with the case of rotating the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise (the period of the angle φ2 in the angle).

Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 face each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be closer than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 abut is reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310, a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333, so that the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25 (b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25 (b), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes long), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25 (a), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 becomes large (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 to the contact position becomes shorter), but since the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed at the contact position of the eccentric cam member 333, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 26 (a) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 26A, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 is shown, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is shown. The view is omitted.

Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is requested while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26A. It usually does not occur that the swing operation member 310 swings in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) without the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Can be prevented.

At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated counterclockwise as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

27 (a) and 27 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 27 (a), the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 27 (b), the swing operation is performed from the state of FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise around the shaft support rod 363, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27 (a) from the state of FIG. 24 (a), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains the same, and the swing operation member 310 is centered on the shaft support rod 363. Can be rocked. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the directions of the forces without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating), so that the operation device 300 can be operated. Can be easy.

During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state of being fixed by the attractive force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), so that it is possible to suppress the change in the operational feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, so that the lever member 340 is counterclockwise to FIG. 27 (b). The load is applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed to the position shown in FIG. 27 (a) when the swing operating member 310 is swung, and the swing operating member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. 27 (b). Can be facilitated.

Next, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. It is formed of a separate member from the main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, a urging force acts in the direction of raising the lever member 2340 from the torsion spring SP21, and at the same time, in the direction of backward rotation of the swing operation member 310 from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). The urging force works.

The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is abutted against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle control rod member 346. It is abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction of raising the swing operation member 310.

The torsion spring SP22 is wound and supported by a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341.

28 (a) and 28 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 28B, the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28 (a) is set as the initial position, and in FIG. 28 (a), the posture P21 in which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, in FIG. 17A, the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment is shown, but since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, it will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that operates each other in a manner in which a pair of members are brought apart from each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around the periphery. The bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, has a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. It mainly includes a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is made of a magnetic material.

The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are shorter in radial length than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) Arranged apart from the left side).

Here, when the swing operation member 310 is arranged as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold the lever member 2340 for the purpose of staging. However, it was difficult to detect whether or not the player gripped the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time, but if the push button operation is frequently requested, the push button must be pushed with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button, so that the player must push the push button. May be stressful.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is arranged apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swing member 2360 swings back and forth due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366, and the neck swings. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a mode of reciprocating and swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28 (a) and the posture P21. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), so that the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20) is used. By detecting with (see), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310.

On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d is detected. Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

Since there is no reaction force generated when the swing operation member 310 is gripped, the force required for the player is small. Further, it is sufficient that the swinging operation member 310 is covered with the player's hand (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). For example, the player puts the weight of the hand on the intermediate frame member 312. It is possible to reduce the stress of the player because it is only necessary.

As a result, whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not it is in the preparation stage for operation) can be performed without requesting the player to operate the push button. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress of the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swing member 2360 is used as an axis support, the vibration transmitted to the player side is increased by aligning the central axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366 with the rotation axis of the swing member 2360. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the central axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rod-shaped member 2331d includes an unlocking shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28A) extending in parallel with the eccentric camshaft 331d2.

29 (a) and 29 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position while the lock member 2336 is placed on the release side. Further, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)).

Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is maintained in a state of being pressed against the upper cover member 344.

When a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swing operation member 310 from the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29 (a)), the swing operation member 310 moves. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). As a result, the player can be made to recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally passes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied.

In the present embodiment, both the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) does not need to be arranged, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the unlock cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). In addition, in FIG. 30C and FIG. 30D, the main body member 2333a is partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the cam member 2333b has a cylindrical portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A pair of cuts extending along the axis in the axial direction and formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 2333b1 and having a hollow inside, and a pair of cuts cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the tubular portion 2333b1. A plate-shaped rib portion 2333b4 that connects the notch 2333b3, the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in the direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 are projected from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1. Mainly includes a convex portion 2333b5.

The convex portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position radially separated from the tubular portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The convex portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape whose side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30A) are arranged so as to intersect the radial direction of the tubular portion 2333b1 along a circular shape centered on the tubular portion 2333b1. Is formed by.

The tubular portion 2333b1 corresponds to the tubular portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical ideas are common, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center thereof. A disk-shaped disk portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disk portion 2333a1. It mainly includes an annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material material is arranged in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

The distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22, and the radial width of the annular recess 2333a3 is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to that of the modified R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the concave depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the convex portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the lever member 2340 to the cam member 2333b are disposed. When an overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives a load in a direction in which the convex portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to suppress deterioration due to rubbing between the magnets.

31 is a view in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31 (b) is a front view of FIG. 31 (b). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 in the XXXIb direction view of a), and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. Note that FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a). In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the convex portion 2333b5 is a circle. It is inserted through the ring recess 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts in the direction of attracting each other between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

At this time, the shape of the convex portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the tubular portion 2333b1, and the area in contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased. The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force equal to or greater than the suction force, the cam member 2333b is slid against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is in a state where the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By being fixed and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), it is possible to change the state so that the reference line O and the straight line Q21 are out of phase.

32 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlocked cam member 2339 in the XXXIIc direction view of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the unlock cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the main body is formed with gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b on the outer peripheral surface. A shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the portion 2339a and the main body portion 2339a and into which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending outward along the front side surface of the main body portion 2339a. Along with this, a release portion 2339c formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extended radially outward at a position of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. Mainly equipped with 2339d.

The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap of a detection sensor (not shown). As a result, the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be detected.

33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 in the XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member for preventing the lever member 2340 from swinging, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a whose tip side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and on the base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and a lock release cam member of the main body portion 2336a. It mainly includes a locking portion 2336d that protrudes above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side facing the 2339 (left side in FIG. 33 (b)).

The main body portion 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that abuts from the lower side of the lever member 2340) formed in the shape of an L-shaped hook abuts on the lever member 2340. It is considered to be an aspect.

The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 2336c can define the swing end of the lock member 2336.

The locking portion 2336c is a portion pushed from the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the lock member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the unlock cam member 2339, which show in chronological order that the lever member 2340 swings due to the rotation of the drive gear 335b. Is.

In FIG. 34 (a), the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (b), the lock release cam member 2339 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state of being rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (c), the state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 to the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) is shown. FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position.

Further, in FIG. 35A, a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 abuts on the lever member 2340 on the side surface on the opposite side (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees) of the tubular portion 2333b1 is shown. 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above. The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 before it comes into contact with the locking portion of the lock member 2336, the unlocking cam member 2339 needs to rotate at an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until it rotates only to the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the unlocked cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

In this way, since the cam member 2333b can rotate relative to the main body member 2333a, even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is a lever member. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by the 2340.

After the unlock cam member 2339 has rotated by the angle θ21, the unlock cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the unlock side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released, so that the eccentric cam member 2333 can be used. The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by a magnetic force and rotate integrally.

When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 is pulled out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34 (d)), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is thereafter regardless of the timing. (Fig. 34 (a) right end) pushes the curved surface of the hook-shaped part of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336 to push the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowers the rear end of the lever member 2340. , The rocking is naturally regulated.

Therefore, for example, when the player operates in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34 (d) regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340. The swing is restricted by swinging the lever member 2340 to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture shown in FIGS. 35 (a) or 35 (b)).

Here, as a measure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed from an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming it is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is sagging or the shape is changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIGS. 34 (d), 35 (a), or 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. When an upward load is applied to (see 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slides against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swinging is regulated by being moved.

On the other hand, in this case, although the postures of the cam members 2333b are the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phases of the unlocked cam members 2339 may be different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, there is a problem that the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required to move the lock member 2336 to the release side by the lock release cam member 2339 is different again, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by detecting the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched. That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34 (b)), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched.

As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing at which the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), and the lever member 2340 can be matched. The timing of drive start can be easily matched.

Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillatedly arranged at the end on the backflip side (see FIG. 28 (a)), and FIG. A state in which the main body member 2361 is swing-arranged (see FIG. 28 (b)) is shown, and in FIG. 36 (c), the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). The state of being slid and moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxially supported by the shaft support rod 363 with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a formed by the shaft hole 361c, the elongated hole 2361f formed along the extending direction of the fixing plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c, and the fixing plate portion 361e extending from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. It mainly comprises 2361 g of elongated holes formed along the direction.

Thereby, unless at least the main body member 2361 is oscillated at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 only swings around the shaft support rod 363.

Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362. It is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing the state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). For ease of understanding, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c).

As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upper side of FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the side, and a U-shaped member 2362d formed in the rod-shaped portions 2362c so as to be slidable and having a crotch width larger than the width of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Mainly prepared for.

The side wall portion 2362b includes an elongated hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged so that the crotch width direction of the U-shape is along the width direction of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged in a direction away from the main body portion 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Will be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. , The shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the elongated holes 2361f, 2361g.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction close to the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (c), and the U-shaped crotch portion is formed. Since it overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361 g, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361 g.

That is, by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

Here, a member that slides and moves the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped first release member 2370 is arranged inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310. A plate-shaped second release member 2380 is mainly provided so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the through hole to be disposed.

The first release member 2370 is arranged so that the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28 (a)) can be slidably moved, and the second release member 2380 is the U on the front side (left side in FIG. 28 (a)). The character-shaped member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

Further, in the first release member 2370, when the release member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end portion of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. It is said to be a shape. In the second release member 2380, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, the swing member 2360 rotates and is arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is arranged on the second release member 2380. The shape is such that it abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid and moved, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid. Since the 2362d is not slid, the swing operating member 310 cannot be slid downward.

38 (a) and 38 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 38 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28 (a) and arranged in a downward position. Further, FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361 g from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a).

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position and is rotated and arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and moved, and the swinging operation member 310 can be slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. Further, a downward force is applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it can be determined that the player does not accidentally apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. can.

Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) with a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from overloading the swing operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operating device 2300 from being destroyed.

When the swing operation member 310 is not overloaded, the swing operation member 310 can be prevented from sliding and moving, so that the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g provide a feeling of operation of the swing operation member 310. It can be prevented from changing.

Next, the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be driven is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward from the torsion spring SP31, and the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward from the torsion spring SP32.

The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is abutted against the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle control rod member 346. It is abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 tilts forward.

The torsion spring SP32 is wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end portion is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in a rising direction with respect to the main body member 341.

39 (a) and 39 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 according to the third embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 3300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. Hereinafter, the solenoid mechanism will be described.

The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic material member 3339 formed from a magnetic material material arranged inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340. ..

The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearwardly and downwardly from the left and right ends of the rear guide portion 345a and integrally molded with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e thereof. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and a current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending in pairs from the front side wall to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the inner cover member 3330. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the N pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the S pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight vertical gap from the locus in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves with the swing of the lever member 3340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic material member 3339 when the lever member 3340 swings.

Here, for example, when an electric current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 39 (a), an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the rear (right side in FIG. 39 (a)). Further, when a current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of tilting forward, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

When the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of tilting forward as in the present embodiment, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 to the side where the lever member 3340 is close to the player when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic material member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is arranged so as to leave a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic material member 3339 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b).

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. 40 (b), the neck The swing operation member 310 does not move up immediately and is maintained in place.

Here, assuming that the urging direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if it is possible to prevent the above, the swing operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player does not notice that the overload is applied, and the swing operation member 310 is repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. Can be kept in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the rod-shaped member 3345f can swing the main body member 341 by receiving an electromagnetic force.

Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the peeling member 350, the lever member is provided by the lock member 336. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the swing of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for the swing of the main body member 341 and the swing of the peeling member 350. Since it is not used for motion, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), and FIG. 41 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41 (a). Therefore, the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340 The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission unit 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

FIG. 41 (a) shows the main body member 341 by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345 f from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31 toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 40 (b). The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be obtained by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b).

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

Further, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40A), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed to incite the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300. Can perform actions. At this time, since the path for the rod-shaped member 3345f to move is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 with a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to deal with the case where the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

It should be noted that the weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if a small current is applied, the speed of the fanning operation can be different. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

42 (a) and 42 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without being viewed in cross section, and the player's hand is shown in an imaginary line for ease of understanding. ..

FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side (right side of FIG. 42 (a)) of the swing operation member 310. From this state, the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), and the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction. Due to the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42 (a)). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting it with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

In this case, the player can perform the input operation simply by putting his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the timing at which the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) in which a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player covers the hand swings in the forward rotation direction). Can be controlled. Therefore, without asking the player for an input operation, the hand is placed on the swing operation member 310, and the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f are controlled, so that the input of the back button 312d is performed on the control side. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at the right time.

Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310 but simply puts his / her hand on the lens member 317, for example, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). Even if the swing is made, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42 (a)). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for inputting in a timely manner, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

This is not possible in the form in which the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below and behind the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is provided on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

Next, the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 restricts the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has a neck. The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 that is pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2, and a lock member 4336 that is pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. Although the arrangement and posture of the drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, they are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d that are projected to the right from the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape.

The rod-shaped member 4331d is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The lock shaft 4331d3 is mainly provided.

The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 with both sides.

The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is formed larger than that of the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position with the end of the cam portion 4333c aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to a certain size.

The lock member 4336 is arranged from the lower side with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side on which the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340 is arranged is arranged upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a).

The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in the shape of a long plate and a transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section and in which the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by the meshing of gears. , Mainly prepared.

The main body member 4336a is formed in a long plate-shaped main body portion 4336a1 and the main body portion 4336a1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A), and a lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted therein. The shaft support hole 4336a2 to be formed, the locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b, and the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. Mainly includes a recessed portion 4336a4 recessed from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 44B) to the front surface side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion where the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion being locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c is locked (see FIG. 45). As a result, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. By setting the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back surface side to be equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is put into a lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of the 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (the posture is held while the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a fan shape in cross section and a gear portion meshed with a drive gear 337b formed on a curved surface portion, and the main body portion 4336b1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted and a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b through a gap of a sensor member (not shown), and a main body. Mainly includes a convex portion 4336b4 which is projected from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 on the side facing the main body member 4336a and which is brought into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

The convex portion 4336b4 is formed at the back end side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. As a result, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction close to the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back surface side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. can.

45 (a) and 45 (b) are side views of the lock member 4336. In FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled arrangement.

The lock member 4336 can be configured as a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45 (a) and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

Further, in the lock forced release state, the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in a direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not abut on the lever member 4340. In the locked forced release state, the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b abuts on the concave portion 4336a4 to maintain the posture of the main body member 4336a.

If the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a from above in the lock standby state, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 47 (a)). If the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 can be swung (see FIG. 48).

Here, by putting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically regulated as the end portion on the contact side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

FIG. 46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a lock receiving member 4350 coaxially supported with a shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341. Is mainly composed of.

The main body member 4341 is arranged in a manner of compensating for the front main body portion 4341a which is formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section and has a notch on the left side of the rear end portion (left side in FIG. 46) and the notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 that attracts the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when it is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section and the current is conducting. And a pair of shaft holes 341b bored in the left-right direction in the substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1.

The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and the main body portion 4351 and the front end portion of the main body portion 4351 in the left-right direction. Mainly includes a shaft hole 4352 which is formed in the shaft hole 341b and coaxially supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward with respect to the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 4300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 is abutted against the lever member 4340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 from below, the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 with the strength of the lock member 4336. Can be done.

When the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3, the lock member 4336 is prevented from swinging toward the lock forced release state (see FIG. 45B). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts forward (leftward in FIG. 47 (a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged. can.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state from the state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47 (a)), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 The lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so that the degree of freedom of production is reduced. There was a problem of

It is also possible to variously change the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340, and to link the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340 to diversify the operating speed. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at a high speed. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) at the timing of swinging the lock member 4336 toward the locked forced release state. It is preferable to detect with.

Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. Thereby, for example, by vibrating the vibrating device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction, and the lever can be pushed back. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

49 (a) and 49 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rearward (FIG. 49) from the state of FIG. 49 (a). The state of being pushed toward 49 (a) to the right) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member 310 is omitted.

In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the locked forced release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of grasping the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state of FIG. 49 (a), the lock member 4336 does not regulate the swing of the lever member 4340, so that the game is played. When the person releases the hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is shown in chronological order. To.

50 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50 (b), the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the swing is restricted. Illustrated, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51 (a) to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50 (a)).

As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swing operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

The lock member 4336 is put into a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of tilting backward (see FIG. 50 (b)). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged in the direction of tilting forward by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45), when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force under the lever member 4340. Enter the side (see FIG. 51 (a)). In this way, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 by arranging the swing operation member 310 in the downward position. You can do it for sure.

In an arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51 (a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 comes into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51 (a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction and returned, but is continuously rotated in the same direction to obtain the eccentric cam. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device that detects the timing at which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the reverse direction, and it is possible to easily control the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 52, by reciprocating the eccentric cam member 4333 around the center of the eccentric camshaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung around the center of the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

At this time, by reciprocating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a state of being arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep the distance long. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

Further, by setting the lock member 4336 to the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being applied a load from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. It is possible to suppress the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43).

53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members in the direction of LIIIb of FIG. 53 (a). It is a side view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. Note that FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 swings in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung.

On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative positions (angles) of the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 change (see FIG. 53 (c)).

54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operating device 4300 viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 in the first embodiment are shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment has the same appearance as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. The description will be given assuming that the 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

Here, in the operation device 4300, the extension length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the swing operation member 310 is projected toward the front side by a distance X41 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

In this case, the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 4010 is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b). Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. 54 (b). The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the condition. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off in a state where the lock member 4336 regulates the swing, the swing operation member 310 even if an external force is applied to the swing operation member 310. There is a problem that the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be put in the packing box.

Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position in the inspection line of the factory or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously arranged in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in this state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost by turning off the power. Therefore, by turning off the power, the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described, but in the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are a single drive motor 335a. Driven synchronously with. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 is a cylindrical unlocking shaft arranged with the eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric camshaft 331d2 and the drive gear 335b behind the eccentric camshaft 331d2. It mainly includes a 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 pivotally supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a lock member 5336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. 56 (c) is a bottom view. FIG. 56 (a) is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIc direction view.

As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D-shape in front view, and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially disposed.

The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape in front view, has a linear shape and extends to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has high rigidity as compared with the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the rigid body portion 5333c1. It is mainly provided with a cushioning portion 5333c2 which is low in diameter and cushions the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to be substantially three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed so as to be able to withdraw the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is operated. There is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance because the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be swung.

In the present embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined by using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side (lower side of FIG. 56B) of the main body portion 333a, the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In the state, when the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

57 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 5339, and FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), FIG. 57 (c). ) Is a side view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIc direction view of FIG. 57 (a).

As shown in FIG. 57, the unlock cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. 5339a, a shaft hole 5339b formed in the center of the main body 5339a and into which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 5339a. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Mainly prepare.

The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed so as to be able to withdraw the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the unlock cam member 5339.

When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (below FIG. 57B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In the state, when the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b when the unlocking cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the lock release cam member 5339 can be inserted into the lock release shaft 5331d5 only in the posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, the lock release cam member 5339 can be assembled in the correct posture.

58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, the lock member 5336 is composed of a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and the transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section (FIG. 44). See) is not required.

The lock member 5336 is formed in the main body member 5336a formed in the shape of a long plate and in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 58 (a)) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted therein. Mainly a shaft support hole 5336b to be formed, and a locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the main body member 5336a facing the unlock cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58 (a)). Prepare for.

The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c. The other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c of.

The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the locus of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. Mainly, a convex portion 5336a2 is provided along a circle centered on a shaft support hole 5336b on a side close to the lever member 4340 from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1.

The convex portion 5336a2 is inclined upward so that the lower end surface toward the tip end surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) on the convex portion 5336a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333.

59 (a) and 59 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) illustrates a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric. It is possible to prevent the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 from colliding with each other.

This is an unavoidable problem when the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment), and this is an unavoidable problem. It is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position as in the embodiment.

Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is mechanical. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can surely bring the lever member 4340 into contact with a specific position (position on the minor axis side, position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c) of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is a lever. Take the posture closest to the member 4340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 5333c from being damaged due to the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

Further, by arranging the cam portion 5333c on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be secured. That is, in the present embodiment, in the embodiment in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate in synchronization with each other, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released ( This is a mode of synchronization in which the amount of movement) is secured to the maximum. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is achieved. Can be improved.

60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. In FIG. 60A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336 is arranged. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state, and in FIG. 60 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam is hit from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load in the rotation direction applied to the drive device becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 hit each other, it is better to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to increase the swing speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the effect of production can be improved.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven independently, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forced release state (see FIG. 48) in the state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and the player can operate the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward due to being pushed up by the 4333 and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is put into the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 can be moved. Rocking can be regulated.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 4336 from applying resistance to the lever member 4340 in a state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled synchronously, the posture of the member for driving the lock member 5336 (the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player.

For example, when the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the locking member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the locking member 5336 half a turn before the unlocking portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lock member 5336 is abutted against the lower side surface of the lever member 4340 whenever the player operates and the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction of tilting forward and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. , Regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 62).

However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when it reciprocates and swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. It may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can suppress the resistance given by the lock member 5336.

Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed to the unlocked state side. (FIG. 60 (a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns in the urging direction, and the lever member 4340 is in the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

Therefore, while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, the swing direction of the lever member 4340 can be regulated at an arbitrary timing.

The unlock cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)), and otherwise the driving force is different from that of the lock member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the lever member 4340.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), until the lock member 5336 is arranged in the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (posture in FIG. 59 (b)). To maintain.

Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). The eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60 (a)), the eccentric cam member 5333 is shown from the posture of a predetermined angle (FIG. 59 (b)). Even if it rotates (up to the posture of 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only filled, and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed from swinging. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60B, and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 is rotated to the arrangement where the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. To.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. Further, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 returns by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336.

Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the curved wall portion 5336a1 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340, so that the lock member 5336 is attached to the lever member 4340. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from the lever.

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured at a high rate, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61 (b)) can be secured at a high rate. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably restricted by the lock member 5336.

FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is pushed down by the player in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b).

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c centered on the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) while the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged in the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (the same direction (FIG. 62 clockwise). The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59 (a)) by rotating it counterclockwise (FIG. 62).

Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (FIG. 62). Rotating clockwise) causes the lever member 4340 to swing, and the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61 (b)) to regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. Can be done.

As a result, after the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric camshaft 331d2, so that the swing width of the lever member 4340 is secured. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

63 (a) and 63 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member that represent the operation of the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 63 (a) illustrates a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (a). When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 63A, in the eccentric cam member 6333, in a state immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 abuts on the lock member 5336, the unlock cam member 5339 is in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. Along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric cam. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lock release cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of the release of the regulation of the lock member 5336.

Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

64 (a) and 64 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336.

In FIG. 64A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336 is arranged. In FIG. 64 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (a), and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is under the lever member 4340. The state of contact with the side surface is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340. Even if the eccentric camshaft swings, the swing is dammed by the eccentric camshaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 will not be damaged.

Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is the most). It is possible to shorten the period in which it is placed at the lower end). As a result, the period in which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a) can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

65 (a) and 65 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. It should be noted that FIG. 65 (a) illustrates a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (b) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Will be done.

Further, by further rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. This regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 65 (a), the unlock cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the lock member 5336 (the unlock portion 5339c of the unlock cam member is separated from the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of resistance from the lock member 5336 to the unlock cam member 5339, and it is possible to stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. Further, when the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 returns by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63 (a)).

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts on the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be largely secured, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61 (b)) can be largely secured. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably restricted by the lock member 5336.

In the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), consider a case where a load is applied from the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are operated in synchronization with each other. Therefore, when the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted from the lever member 4340. The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end portion is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the lock release cam accompanies the clockwise rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, since there is no possibility that the unlock cam member 5339 abuts on the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

In this embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 are at different positions in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). It is placed at a position that does not interfere in the parallel direction of the paper surface). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlocked cam member 5339 rotate in the proximity direction in FIG. 65 (a), they interfere with each other from the state of FIG. 65 (a). Since they pass each other, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 from being damaged.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly gives resistance to the lever member 340 has been described, but the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. A case where resistance is applied from the gear damper 7347 to the lever member 7340 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the swing of the peeling member 7350 is restricted by the lock member 336 and peeled from the lever member 7340. The state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66A, the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 disposed inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change, so that the lever does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the peeling member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is peeled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player necks). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel off the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and encourage the player to properly use the swing operation member 310.

For example, in the state of FIG. 66B, the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the state of being sucked and fixed, the operating resistance becomes small and the player can easily operate the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating device 7300 from being destroyed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock member 336, 2336, 4336, 5336 is pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, 5330 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. Further, FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to the right cover member (not shown) arranged in pairs with the left cover member 8331.

The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, the inner side surface is composed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 arranged on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1 and the inner side surface are smooth surfaces. The second slide hole 8331i2 is mainly provided and is arranged on the lever support shaft 331d1 side with respect to the first slide hole 8331i1.

The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-shaped slide plate 8370 arranged so as to slide and move along the inner side surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is provided with a shaft portion 8336f that is a cylindrical portion inserted through the shaft support hole 336b and penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is pivotally supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a mode of being separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67 (a)) in a state of facing each other. Mainly provided with a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that face-to-face contact with the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state of facing each other (see FIG. 68 (a)), and each side surface is slightly provided. It is composed of a curved rhombus.

As shown in FIG. 67A, the first side surface 8336f1a is formed from a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. Ru. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

In the state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not abut on the second slide hole 8331i2 and a predetermined distance is left, so that the lock member 8336 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370.

Note that FIG. 67B shows a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side. Even in this state, there is a slight gap between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It is possible to prevent the operation feeling from being impaired during the dynamic operation.

On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed side by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. This makes it easy to arrange the lock member 8336 on the fixed side at a desired position.

The slide plate 8370 includes a convex portion 8371 that is inserted through the slide hole 8331i and is projected in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that is rotated by the drive motor 8373 and meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Mainly prepare.

The convex portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. The slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 is swung while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350.

By driving the drive gear 8374, the drive motor 8373 makes it possible to arrange the lock member 8336 at the position on the release side (see FIG. 67 (a)) and the position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is a driving means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370, it slides and moves together with the slide plate 8370.

The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface, and the magnet portion 8372 is attracted to the peeling member 350 by the magnetic sensor MC1, or the peeling member 350 is separated from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not it is. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), whereby the lever is arranged. It is detected that the member 340 is located at the end of the swing range. Further, in the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state of FIG. 67 (a) and the state of FIG. 67 (b), the player swings the swing operation member 310. It is possible to detect that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main control device). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, which may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

In the embodiment in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member is in the process of swinging. It was difficult to fix the 340 with the lock member 336.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the swing of the lever member 340 is stopped by the lock member 8336 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It is possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be done. This will be described below.

68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), by rotating the drive gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the slide movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the release member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is used for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. The slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68 (a) even if a load in the vertical direction is applied to some extent.

From the state of FIG. 68A, when the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) downward to the swing operation member 310, It is peeled off from the peeling member 350 from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged by transmitting a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player to the lock member 8336.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of the moving range (in the middle of the moving range of the lever member 340), so that the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. However, by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from coming into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the upper range of the peeling member 350) is narrowed, so that the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the release member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. can.

69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69 (a), the lever member 340 and the release member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the release member is arranged with the lock member 8336 on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where the 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by a solid line, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is shown from the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (a). The state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides and moves together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (decelerated due to frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i) and peeling. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 may be separated from each other (see FIG. 69 (a) solid line portion).

In this case, the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and when the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the release member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The contact may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is immediately controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69 (b)), thereby peeling. The upper side surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower side surface of the member 350.

As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the release member 350 abuts on the lock member 8336 before the release member 350 abuts on the eccentric cam member 333, thereby moving downward. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the lock member 8336 is configured to slide and move together with the release member 350 as in the present embodiment.

That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lock member 336 is fixed on the fixed side depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B). Even if it is arranged in, the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude toward the peeling member 350 side rather than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. , The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged is not sufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the release member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (a state in which the release member 350 abuts on both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). By arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the release member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the upper side surface of the lock member 8336 is placed on the release member 350 rather than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the peeling member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves in such a manner that the maximum diameter portion approaches the release member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the release member 350. Because.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are entirely rigid has been described, but the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is attached to the swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340 from a coil spring. The elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is downward in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). The state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-shaped elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in pairs up and down near the swing operation member 310.

When the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to substantially the same length. In addition, in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 70 (a) (both contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swing operation member 310, the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered. It is set higher than the elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their expansion / contraction states (upper elastic connecting member). (Because the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the load is applied to the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the internal member of the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), FIG. 72 (a) and FIG. 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

Further, in FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position is shown, and in FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is shown in FIG. 71 (a) from the state of FIG. 71 (a). ), The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101 is shown. The state of being rotated by a large angle θ102 is shown, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. A drive gear 10335 is provided with an eccentric camshaft 10331i and is rotationally driven by a drive motor at a position separated from the eccentric camshaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the torsion spring-like torsion spring SP101 formed of an elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in a direction that pushes the swing operation member 310 downward.

As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly urged in such a manner that it is pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 to push down the rear end of the lever member 340. Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, it is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged by the sliding of the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 The load from the eccentric cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. The position is deviated from the rib portion 2333b4 of the above by a predetermined angle (position deviated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction of FIG. 71).

As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71 (a), the load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is applied to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 separates from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is arranged under the peeling member 350 so that the lever member 340 cannot swing any more (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is It is considered to be the terminal position).

When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. Further, when the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), the swing operation member 310 swings downward. By repeating the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and the counterclockwise rotation in this way, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. Further, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

When the swinging operation member is reciprocated up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), whereby the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 in the circumferential direction are the same. This is because it can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the release member 350 is restricted from moving by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player placing a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged in the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 from the state of FIG. 73 (a). From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Illustrated in.

In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340. .. As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (B)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is applied. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

When the player applies a load in the pushing-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). As a result, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player loads a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attraction force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) on the swing operation member 310. Because it is necessary to do (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the lever member. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (fanned).

This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down, the reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swinging operation member 310, and the player feels the operation. Can be granted.

On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates and swings at high speed. This makes it possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to inform the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocated up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, which causes the player to perform an operation reaction force. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and it can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, it has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, it has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched depending on the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can be promoted to perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are structurally not related has been described, but the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is the swinging operation member 11310. The resistance at the time of swinging of the lens member 317 is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 according to the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, in FIG. 75 (a), a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to the load of pushing is shown, and in FIG. 75 (b), the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 75A, in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and a through hole is formed in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole is formed through the vibrating device 11366 and penetrating from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g that is inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and formed in the shape of a pair of leaf springs. ..

The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the torsion spring in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75 (b)). It is arranged at a position where the SP2 is sandwiched. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in the shape of a leaf spring, and in the state of FIG. 75B, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centered on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component in 75 (a) vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 11366.

As a result, the same vibration device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 11310 to attract the player's attention in the no-load state. It can be compatible.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 11310 increases due to the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described, but the operation device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361d of the swing member 360. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 according to the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, in FIG. 76 (a), a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to the load of pushing is shown, and in FIG. 76 (b), the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

In the intermediate frame member 12312, the opening at the center of the bottom portion 312a is enlarged with respect to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g in which an enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 is extended downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can come into contact with the regulating rod 365.

The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76 (a)), and the restricting rod is in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76 (b)). It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle control hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle control hole 361d, it is possible to suppress the swinging operation of the swing operation member 12310 centering on the shaft support rod 363. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component in 76 (a) in the vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 366.

As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 12310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is shrunk so that the swing operation member 310 can be stored rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10, and is a box for packing. When it protrudes from the box, the front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in the packing box.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 causes viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are suction-fixed. In this case, the resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operation feeling can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 come into contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position upwardly separated from the eccentric cam member 4333.

In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform a fanning operation in which the swing operation member 310 is reciprocated up and down.

Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the fanning operation can be performed. Moreover, even if the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the fanning operation, the lock member 4336 can restrict the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to restrict the swing of the lever member 340, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is arranged from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other. It may be inserted into the lower side of the rear end portion of the lever member 340.

In this case, since it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that fits under the lever member 340, the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in an intermediate posture in the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side.

In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted, so that the player can operate the lever member 340. As a result, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that the momentum is applied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from colliding vigorously with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

Further, for example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player notices that the swing operation member is heavy. There can be time to ease the load on the 310.

On the other hand, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the peeling member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged in information rather than the intermediate position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not abut on the release member 350). It may be arranged in.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is made larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that the elastic recovery is performed. The lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward in the later state. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<An example of a technical concept in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player and a restricting member that regulates the movement of the moving member, the moving member is provided by the player. The operation member to be operated and the regulated member connected to the operation member and capable of restricting the movement by the restricting member are provided, and the regulated member is restricted from moving by the restricting member. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the shape of the moving member is deformably configured by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a restricting member by a manual operation by a player (for example,). See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player applies an overload to the moving member in a state where the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the regulating member through the moving member, and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of restricting movement to the regulating member, and is regulated. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the restricting member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. By doing so, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

The structure of the moving member that realizes the deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the load is, for example, a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, or a structure in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. An example is a configuration in which each part is attracted by a magnetic force.

In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player applies an overload to the operating member. The greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more the player applies an overload to the operating member, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by a magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member is not applied until a load greater than the attractive force is applied. The shape of is deformed. As a result, when operating normally with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the operation of the moving member can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member is relatively movable with respect to the regulated member by being loaded with the load of the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member can be configured, so that the operating member can be operated in the fixed state. It is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member in the non-transmission state while ensuring the property.

In the gaming machines A1 and 2, a support member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first axis arranged on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 and 2, it is possible to suppress a large load from being applied between the regulating member and the regulated member by operating the operating member, and the regulating member or the subject can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

The gaming machine A4 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a swinging direction, and the urging force is applied to the operating member side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operating member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the addition of urging force. This makes it possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner of connecting the operating member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand or contract in the fixed state, but the operating member is not transmitted. An example is the case where the spring member between the regulated member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the regulated member becomes large, so that an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulated member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in the direction of tilting the operating member forward, and the fixed state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the moving member is restricted from swinging by the restricting member.

Here, if the urging direction of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, the operating member is separated from the regulated member and regulated when the player applies a downward overload to the operating member. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the overload is applied and the operating member may be repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the direction of urging the operating member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward, so that the operating member is tilted downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operating member.

In the gaming machine A4, the first axis is arranged laterally in the longitudinal direction, the urging force of the first urging member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement in the fixed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the restricting member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the operating member is directed in a direction to be raised, and a downward load is applied to the operating member to form a non-transmission state, so that the player can operate the operating member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to form a non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operating members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

In the gaming machine A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. It is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating viscous resistance, and is characterized in that the gear portion disposed on the operating member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the higher the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. .. Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is small (the return speed of the operation member is small) is suppressed, and for example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. The resistance can be increased.

As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the design of the first urging member is free. The degree can be improved.

The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A8, the gear damper is arranged in a manner in which a viscous resistance is generated in the relative movement of the operating member and the regulated member.

Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operating member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operating member.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operating member only when the player applies a load to the operating member so that the regulated member and the operating member form a non-transmission state. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the operation member and encourage the player to use the operation member appropriately.

For example, the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the operating member.

Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operating member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being destroyed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmitting member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member receives a load and is described. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is arranged at a position where the load is not transmitted when the fixed state is changed to the non-transmission state.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state, the load is not transmitted to the transmission member. , It is possible to suppress damage to the transmission member and improve the durability of the transmission member.

The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member is the position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received, or the position in which the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received. In some cases, a position in which the moving member moves and is separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, when the swing of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member, even if the driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging the regulated member and not for rocking the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulated member from being damaged.

In the gaming machines A2 to A11, the operation member is arranged in the second position as compared with the case where the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. The moving member is restricted from moving by the restricting member when the moving member is arranged at the second position, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the fixed state is configured by being used.

Here, since the width of the operating member overhanging outward is smaller when the swing of the operating member is restricted at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing a gaming machine, the operating member is controlled at the first position. The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the fixed state.

On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swing of the operating member is restricted at the second position, the operating member cannot be moved from the second position and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed in the first position on the inspection line of a factory or the like, the operation member is mistakenly placed in the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, even if the moving member is restricted from moving at the second position where the operating member overhangs, the operating member and the regulated member are restricted. Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, the fixing between the operating member and the regulated member can be released by turning off the power supply. As a result, the operating member can be easily arranged in the first position, the gaming machine can be stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be facilitated.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a moving member that generates a driving force generated from the driving device. A gaming machine including a transmission member for transmitting to, wherein the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the moving member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -144218 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is lowered, or the moving member is driven by the driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the drive device and the transmission member. It can be suppressed. Further, by driving, it is possible to suppress the moving member from giving a load to the player. Examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member rotated about the first axis.

Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide with each other. As the moving width of the moving member increases, the arm length of the transmitting member often becomes longer. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged due to the collision.
On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, when the moving member is driven in a portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is long. While ensuring the amount of movement, when colliding with the moving member, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which the portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is short is directed toward the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

The gaming machine B2 is provided with a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member are brought close to each other. The gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member, so that the moving member is moved by rotating the transmission member around the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier to attract the player's attention to the moving member.

In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is pivotally supported by a second axis extending in the left-right direction, which is an axis different from the first axis, and the moving member is operated by the player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween and under the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the transmission member is under the moving member in a state where the second axis is extended in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the direction of tilting forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmission member when the player pushes down the operating member. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the transmission member.

In the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the operating member is provided with an effect member that produces an effect on the player.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, the operating member is provided with an effecting member for producing an effect on the player, so that the operating member can attract the attention of the player.

Examples of the effect device for producing the effect on the player include a light emitting device such as an LED arranged on the board, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

In the gaming machine B5, the staging member includes at least a vibrating device that generates vibration, and a load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is directed in a direction in which the moving member is separated from the transmission member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by this.

Here, when the staging device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the staging member is provided with a vibrating device that causes at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is a moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, so that the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member can be reduced by the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the gaming machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, the vibrating device is arranged at a substantially central portion of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrated by the vibrating device is outside the operating member. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that it is connected to a shell as a rigid body.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is arranged in the substantially central portion of the operating member. Can secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. On top of that, the vibrating part vibrated by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, so that the vibration is directly applied to the fingers of the player who operates the operating member. I can tell. Therefore, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operating member is provided with a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is a second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with the shaft in between, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. Can be reduced.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the pushing member is configured to be in a pushable state in which the pushing member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the pushing member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed in.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, a pushable state in which the push-in member can be pushed in and a push-in impossible state in which the push-in member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed in are configured. The effect on the moving member can be switched on the gaming machine side by the operation performed by the player.

For example, when a player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member intermittently, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the moving member receives a load in a direction close to the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the moving member also moves in a direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide with each other due to the operating member returning upward due to the urging force.

In addition, as a method of constructing a push-in impossible state, a method of locking the push-in member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to extend the push-in member to the terminal position. An example is a method (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the terminal position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device causes both the action of vibrating the pushing member and the action of making the pushing member in a pushable state. Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the side in which the rotation direction of the transmission member is separated from the first axis across the second axis is said. The gaming machine B10 characterized in that it is oriented in a direction facing the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is the direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis across the second axis. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second axis to the contact position between the moving member and the transmitting member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by a first shaft, and is pivotally supported and pivotally supported by a rotary gear to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving device and the first shaft. An eccentric cam that comes into contact with a member is provided, and a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear can move relative to the eccentric cam are configured. A game machine B11 characterized by being made possible.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is equal to or higher than the threshold value from the moving member. When a load is received, the load applied to the eccentric cam can be released from the moving member by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmissive state. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

The case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear can be configured in a non-transmission state is, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are attracted and fixed by a magnetic force, or the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are in the circumferential direction. An example is the case where the gears are fitted by friction.

<An example of the technical idea that the lock member that fixes the moving member is operated synchronously with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and an eccentric support to the first axis. A gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving device to the moving member and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member causes the swinging of the moving member. It is possible to configure a regulateable standby state and a release state in which the restriction on the swing of the moving member is released, and the transmission member and the restricting member operate in synchronization with each other by the driving force of the driving device. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is oscillated by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member driven by a driving device. Under the urging force that moves the moving member in the direction close to the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, the swinging of the moving member is regulated during the swinging of the moving member, and the swinging of the moving member is regulated at a predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a restricting member to be released (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the minor axis side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side that comes into contact with the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swing of the moving member. It is possible to prevent damage to the transmission member when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, but if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed and the eccentricity is eccentric. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member may collide with the moving member on the major axis side and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. The posture of the transmission member when is in the released state can be mechanically determined. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with each other with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the restricting member is synchronously operated with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the restriction on the swing of the moving member, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the restriction is released. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is put into the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member by moving the moving member to a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, after the regulating member releases the restriction on the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for the swinging of the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the regulating member moving together when the transmission member is rotated.

Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (release of the swing restriction of the moving member) can be performed.

In the gaming machine C2, when the restricting member is in the standby state, the restricting member is moved in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the restricting member, whereby the swing of the moving member is restricted. The moving member is made capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed from the swing locus of the outer peripheral portion of the moving member when the first operation is executed.

When the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member so that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a preliminary step for restricting the swinging direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to be restricted in the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, when the moving member executes the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. This makes it possible to suppress the load applied to the transmission member.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. It is composed of an eccentric cam, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved by a urging force toward the transmitting member, the inside of the cam portion of the transmitting member. The first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member, is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis, and the moving member is the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member and is arranged when the first side surface thereof starts to come into contact with the moving member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the restriction on the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, and the moving member moves with a urging force toward the transmission member. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member of the transmission member, is configured to be in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be secured to the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is secured immediately after the restriction on the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

In the gaming machine C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface on the opposite side of the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is better to prevent the large diameter portion from hitting the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmitting member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmitting member hit each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion because the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, so that the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, and the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved. Can be made to.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released by the restricting member, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the transmission member is provided with a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates around the first axis, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member and moves following the rotation of the transmitting member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on the swing of the moving member is lifted. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<Example of technical concept in which the operation unit placed at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
The vibration device is provided with a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, and a vibration device that is arranged on the moving member and is capable of generating vibration. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of the moving member and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined to each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent problems such as shaking of the gaming machine due to the vibration of the vibrating device being transmitted to the gaming machine. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibrating device arranged on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is caused by the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Examples of the vibration device include a voice coil motor that constitutes vibration in the linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

The game machine D1 includes a drive device that generates a driving force that causes the moving member to swing, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, and the vibration device is in a linear direction. The gaming machine D2 is composed of a device that generates vibration, and the transmission member is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibrating device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is composed of a device that generates vibration in a linear direction, and the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second shaft disposed on the moving member, and the vibration of the vibrating device is supported. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a cushioning member for absorbing vibration is arranged on the second axis.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second axis arranged on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis and the cushioning member is arranged on the second axis, the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the cushioning member. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the moving member includes a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotational resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the vibrating device and secure a large vibration component, particularly when the player pushes the pushing member. Thereby, the state in which the vibrating device can easily rotate on the second axis and the state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

In the gaming machine D4, the gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed in, the vibrating device is vibrated and swung around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device, while when the pushing member is pushed in, the vibrating device swings. It is possible to increase the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player by suppressing the vibration. Therefore, the behavior of the vibrating device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through a position separated from the second axis. A game machine D6 characterized by being played.

When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as the shaft support, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased by matching the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device with the shaft support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the gaming machine. Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is rotated by shifting the rotation axis of the vibration device and the vibration center axis of the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be utilized and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved by vibrating the vibrating device.

The gaming machine D6 includes a detecting device for detecting the vibration of the vibrating device, and the vibrating device is arranged on an operating member held by the player.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, a vibration device is arranged on the operating member gripped by the player, and the vibration device is provided with a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device, so that the vibration device vibrates. By grasping the operating member while the vibration is being performed, vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. This makes it possible to detect whether the player is holding the operating member (whether it is in the preparatory stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of moving members that perform fanning>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with an input device for the player to input and operate, and the input device is driven in a direction away from the player and is provided with an input unit which is a portion for performing an input operation.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a timing for operating an input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that they cannot concentrate on the game because they are distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglect the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in the direction of approaching the player and the player's fingers. By operating the input unit in a manner of pushing it back when it comes into contact with the machine, the timing of operation of the input unit can be determined on the gaming machine side.

Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

In the game machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device and the direction of operating the input unit coincide with each other, and the vibrating device is arranged at the input. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibrating device is pressed against the input unit, and the input unit is retracted from the input unit when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit can be operated, the vibrating device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

In the gaming machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device, so that the vibrating device is separated from the input device. The input unit can be operated with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning to the desired position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration that the player passively feels.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be grasped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm. The gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, an input device provided with an input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be grasped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input device is formed. Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while grasping it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the input device can be unnecessary.

Further, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, the operation of the input unit vibrating can be grasped only by the player who holds the input unit. As a result, it is possible to announce a big hit or the like in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that a locking portion for locking a finger is provided on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input portion side is received by the palm and the finger is hooked on the locking portion to generate the vibration by the vibration device. Can be trapped inside the palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of vibration felt by the player.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Patent Document 1). : Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the durability of the transmission member.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having good durability of a transmission member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 generates a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position and a driving force that moves the moving member by being operated by the player. A gaming machine including a driving device for causing the movement and a transmission member for transmitting a driving force generated from the driving device to the moving member, and the moving member is operated in one direction to cause the moving member to move. It moves in a direction away from the transmission member.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is composed of a member in which the transmission member is eccentrically supported by the first axis and rotated about the first axis in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 includes, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is the movement. This is the direction in which the member and the transmission member are brought close to each other.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the durability of the transmitting member can be further improved by the posture when the transmitting member receives a load.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the configuration of the transmission member can be utilized for the production.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d 2nd sensor member (detection device)
317 Lens member (part of input device, input part, pushing member)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330 Inner case member (part of support member)
331d1 Lever support shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
331d2 Eccentric camshaft (1st axis)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336 Lock member (regulatory member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340 Lever member (part of moving member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (2nd shaft)
364 Cushioning member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Main body member (rotary gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall part (concave part)
CS1 vibration coil spring (second urging device)
CS2 push-in coil spring (first urging device)
M41 electromagnet member (electromagnet)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first urging member)

Claims (3)

A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a moving member that generates a driving force generated from the driving device. A gaming machine equipped with a transmission member that transmits to
A gaming machine characterized in that when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member that is rotated about the first axis. 2. The described gaming machine.

Images